JP7044830B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, a special gaming state (for example, an AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and a special gaming state in which the expectation of transition to this special gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state (for example, an AT state). For example, it has been proposed to provide a CZ (chance zone) state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-104445

By the way, since such a special game state is one of the states in which the player enhances the interest of the game, for example, if the playability related to the duration, the lottery content, etc. is monotonous, the interest of the game There was a problem that there was a possibility that the amount would decrease.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
It was determined that a variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) for determining an internal winning combination. It is advantageous to the player when special conditions are satisfied with the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the reel stop control process) that stops the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. The special gaming state control means (for example, the second gaming machine controls each gaming state) that can be controlled to the special gaming state (for example, the RB state or the BB state in the second gaming machine) to which the information of the stop operation is notified. Main CPU101) and a special gaming state (for example, a second game) in which the expectation that the special condition is satisfied is higher than that in the normal gaming state (for example, the normal state in the second gaming machine) when the special condition is satisfied. A special gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in a second gaming machine) that can be controlled by the CZ2 state in the machine) is provided .
The stop control means is a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell in the second gaming machine) is determined as an internal winning combination, and a stop operation in a predetermined mode (for example, a correct answer push order) is performed. Displays a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine), and displays a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination when a stop operation different from the predetermined mode is performed, and the special When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the gaming state, special notification capable of notifying information on the stop operation (for example, 4-choice navigation, 2-choice navigation, or all navigation) that is advantageous for displaying the predetermined symbol combination. Further equipped with means (for example, an instruction monitor and an effect display unit),
In the special gaming state , the number of games is not specified, and the number of times the predetermined combination is not displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination reaches the specified number of times (for example, 7 times). It is a gaming machine characterized by being continuously configured .
Further, the gaming machine according to claim 2 is
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the specified number of times is set to at least two times or more.
According to this gaming machine, in the special gaming state where the expectation of transition to the special gaming state is higher than that of the normal gaming state, the number of games is not specified, and whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. The duration varies depending on the crab. That is, it is possible to cause undulations during the game period in the special game state according to the game result of the player. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

Further , according to this gaming machine, whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won in the special gaming state (that is, whether or not the gaming period in the special gaming state progresses) is further determined. It also varies depending on whether or not the stop operation information is notified. That is, it is possible to cause undulations during the game period in the special game state depending on whether or not the stop operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine according to claim 3 is
When the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the special gaming state, a privilege granting means (for example, a CP granting lottery) capable of granting a predetermined privilege (for example, CP in the second gaming machine) that contributes to the establishment of the special condition is provided. Main CPU 101) to perform and
Further provided with a grant status notification means capable of notifying the grant status of the predetermined privilege in the special gaming state .
The privilege granting means can further grant the predetermined privilege according to the establishment of the special condition.
In the special gaming state, when the predetermined privilege grant status becomes a predetermined situation (for example, the cumulative CP is 5), the special condition can be satisfied.
The grant status notification means can notify the grant status of the predetermined privilege without including the predetermined privilege granted in response to the establishment of the special condition, and the grant status notification means grants the predetermined privilege. The above-mentioned description, characterized in that the granting status of the predetermined privilege may be the predetermined situation even if the situation is not notified that the predetermined situation is reached. It is a game machine.
According to this gaming machine, for example, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a game in which a predetermined combination is won, it is possible not only to prevent the gaming period of the special gaming state from progressing, but also to shift to the special gaming state. It is possible to give a predetermined privilege that contributes to. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.
Further, in the notification of the grant status, the result of the initial CP grant lottery may not be taken into consideration, and only the result of the normal CP grant lottery may be notified or suggested.

Further , according to this gaming machine, it is possible to give a predetermined privilege even when a special gaming state is started. That is, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the special gaming state even when the special gaming state is started. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

Further , according to this gaming machine, in a special gaming state, for example, if a predetermined combination of symbols can be displayed when a predetermined combination is won, the special gaming state is continued and a predetermined privilege is given, and as a cumulative result thereof. There may also be a benefit that allows you to move to a special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows the external structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment, stop operation mode, display combination and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the limit processing of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the mode flag storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of the game start in advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state control process at the end of a game which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the end of a game in an advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the medalless gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main control board of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment, and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment, stop operation mode, display combination and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment, stop operation mode, display combination and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the instruction monitor of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the instruction monitor of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the lock effect of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the start time effect which is executed at the time of starting the RB state of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the start time effect which is executed at the time of starting the RB state of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the push order history display of the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Structure of pachislot machine]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Note that FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, for convenience of explanation, a part of the internal structure may be described in the following description of the external structure, and a part of the external structure may be described in the description of the internal structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. Further, the housing 2 is arranged in a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the gaming machine, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper part of the front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower part of the front surface of the cabinet G. It also has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, an upper surface wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. In FIGS. 1 and 2, the back wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 are not shown. Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G4a penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. Then, a wooden plate member G4b is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to fix the pachi-slot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in a game store, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, a metal material or a resin material is used. It can be configured with, or it can be integrally formed with the upper surface wall G4. Further, as long as a certain strength is secured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each constituent member may be made of wood or a resin material.

Further, in the cabinet G, an upper opening portion G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening portion G101 that opens forward on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space with the intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate for partitioning the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. There is. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the main display device 210 and the like, which will be described later. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device or the like is appropriately accommodated in the cabinet G, the upper space and the lower space may not be partitioned. Further, the cabinet G can be simply referred to as a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, the "main body frame" and "main body" are used. It can also be referred to as a "support", a "support frame", a "fixed frame", or the like.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door (front door) provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable by, for example, an opening / closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. One of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the above-mentioned opening / closing mechanism, and the other can be attached / detached only when one of the door mechanisms is opened. You can also do it.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided at the center thereof and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and the effect image displayed on the screen device C constituting the main display device 210 described later provided on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays the effect via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion thereof, and a reel unit RU on the back side of the main display window 4 and mounted on the inner side of the cabinet G. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is composed of, for example, a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent reel band mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body, and a plurality of reel bands (for example, 20) are included in the reel band. The symbols (pieces) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and at least a part (for example, three) of the symbols on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. Further, inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, a light source (reel lamp included in the lamps / LEDs described later) is provided at least at a position where the design can be visually recognized from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, When the 3C and 3R are rotating, the visibility of the design is ensured by illuminating them from the inside with a constant brightness.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4 and an effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-effect display unit 22 displays the effect image displayed on the sub-display device 220, which will be described later. The sub-effect display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel to function not only as a function for displaying the effect but also as one of the buttons for effect. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in a substantially horizontal pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, a MAX bet button 6a, a 1-bet button 6b, and a settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and a substantially central portion. It has an effect button 10a provided and a medal insertion slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are player's game operations (bet operation, "insertion operation" and "hanging operation") for using the medals deposited (credited) inside the pachi-slot machine 1. It is also an operation unit that accepts). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) and the number of medals credited is equal to or greater than the difference, the maximum number of medals is bet. To. On the other hand, if there are no more credited medals than the difference, the medals will not be bet. Further, when the 1-bet button 6b is operated, the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, and if there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a player's game operation (settlement operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. If the checkout button 9 is operated without any credited medals, the medals to be inserted or paid out will be credited within the range of creditable medals (for example, 50). It may be possible to accept a player's game operation (C / P mode selection operation) for selecting either a mode (C mode) or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medal is not credited. That is, the settlement button 9 can be made to function as a so-called C / P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The accepted medal is detected by the selector 31 described later, and it is determined whether or not the medal is appropriate. If one received medal is not appropriate, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout port 11 described later. Further, if one received medal is appropriate and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of medals being credited has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, when the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payment exit 11 described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned pedestal portion. The information display device 14 is configured to include a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information about the game depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided below the above-mentioned pedestal portion, with a start lever 7 provided on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R provided in the substantially central portion, and on the right side. It has a locking mechanism 15. The start lever 7 is an operation unit that is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range and receives a player's game operation (start operation) for starting the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation unit that receives a player's game operation (stop operation) for stopping each rotation.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, a manager on the game store side (for example, a store clerk of the game store, the same applies hereinafter) has a door key (not shown) in the keyhole. ) Is inserted and turned to the right to unlock and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. The locking mechanism 15 may have a function as a reset switch as well as a function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when the administrator of the game store turns the door key to the left with the door key inserted in the keyhole, the same reset operation as the reset switch 53 described later may be detectable. Further, in the present embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be locked. It is also possible to provide a mechanism separately so that the opening and closing can be controlled independently.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD includes a waist panel 13 provided in the central portion of the lower portion thereof, a medal tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal payout outlet 11 provided above the medal tray 12. , Has sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout outlet 11.

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name and a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side (for lamps and LEDs described later). Consists of a lumbar lamp included). The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges the medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from the hopper device 32 described later and those returned from the selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are on the back side of each, and are output from speakers 35a and 35b (speakers 35a are omitted in FIG. 2) mounted on the inner side of the cabinet G, and sound effects such as sound effects and BGM. Is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided corresponding to the partitioning of the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space, but the opening in the cabinet G is appropriately provided. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. Further, it can be configured as a door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door, etc.) which are doubly configured in the front-rear direction. Further, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "door", and since they function as a member that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G, the "opening / closing member" and the "door". It can also be referred to as a "member" or a "door member".

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the start operation is performed by the player), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate by the drive control of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later. As a result, the design displayed on the main display window 4 is variablely displayed. Further, in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the stop operation is performed by the player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later are driven and controlled. By doing so, each rotation is stopped. As a result, the symbol displayed on the main display window 4 is stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 have a variable display unit (means) capable of variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, or variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols. ) Configure a plurality of possible variable display units (means). The variable display unit (means) can also be referred to as a "design display unit (means)", a "variable display unit (means)", or the like. Further, the design can also be referred to as a "picture", a "pattern", or the like, and can also be referred to as "identification information" or the like in that sense as long as the information is visually identifiable by the player.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three symbols arranged continuously for each are displayed in the frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas in each column (3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the main display window 4). The design is displayed in the mode of). The main display window 4 may be referred to as a "design display area", a "window portion", or the like.

Further, an effective line is defined in the main display window 4. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not the specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all the columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stop operation. In that sense, the effective line can also be referred to as a "winning line", a "judgment line", or the like. Further, the effective line is configured as a line connecting any of the areas of each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display a symbol in a mode of 3 rows × 3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 effective lines. However, in reality, one or more of these lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle region of the reel 3L, the middle region of the reel 3C, and the middle region of the reel 3R is a "center line", the upper region of the reel 3L, the upper region of the reel 3C, and the upper region of the reel 3R. The connecting line is the "top line", the lower region of the reel 3L, the lower region of the reel 3C, and the line connecting the lower region of the reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower region of the reel 3L, the middle region of the reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line connecting the upper area is called "cross-up line", the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called "cross-down line", and these are called "cross down line". Since it is a line connecting each region with a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as an effective line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line connecting each region of each column with a polygonal line can be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the valid line to be activated, it is necessary to bet the number of medals required for this game (the number of cards that can be started) prior to the start operation of the player, but this is valid. The number of valid lines to be converted may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the above-mentioned three lines of "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are defined as valid lines, in the former case, the number of bets is any of 1 to 3. Even so, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" should be enabled. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated, and if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and the "top line" are activated, and the number of bets is 3. If (maximum number of bets), enable "center line", "top line", and "bottom line".

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column, whereby three rows × 3 Although it was supposed to display the symbol in the mode of the column, the mode of displaying the symbol in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is 1, 2, or 4 or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column is 1, 2, or 4 or more, which is different from the above aspect. You can also display the design with. In this case, the number of valid lines that can be defined is also increased or decreased as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit is supposed to display the symbol in a variable manner by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, a configuration using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 described later may be used, or a configuration using other display devices (for example, an organic EL, a 7-segment LED, etc.) may be used. .. Further, for example, a configuration using another physical device (for example, a belt or the like) may be used. In addition, the arrangement and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main side display unit directly related to the game, which is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later, but at the same time, the sub control circuit 200 described later is used. A variable display unit as a sub-side display unit related to an effect not directly related to the game, which is controlled by the game, may be provided. The sub-side display unit may be configured by using, for example, a main display device 210 or a sub-display device 220. That is, a variable display unit that changes and displays the symbol according to the player's start operation (or other start condition is satisfied) and stops and displays the symbol according to the player's stop operation (or other stop condition is satisfied). As a result, not only the main side display unit but also the sub side display unit may be provided. In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether or not the variable display unit is directly related to the game, characters such as "rotary cylinder" or "main reel" are placed in the vicinity of the main display unit. It suffices to attach an identification display in which is displayed so that it is possible to identify that the variable display unit is the main display unit. It should be noted that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal slot 5 for receiving medals to be inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. Since the medal insertion slot 5 and the selector 31 described later have a function of betting the number of medals required for one game, like the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b, such an insertion operation is performed. , For example, it can be paraphrased as a betting operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 5 is a bet operation detecting unit (means) capable of detecting the betting operation of the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

In the present embodiment, it is described as an example that a medal as a game medium is used as a game value used for a game or given according to a game result, but the game value used in this way is Not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be used. Further, the game value may be simply referred to as "value", "game value", or the like.

[1-1-5. Operation unit]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. It should be noted that each of the operation units shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include an operation unit different from these, or may be configured not to include an operation unit that is not necessarily essential. ..

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1-bet button 6b that accept a player's betting operation for using the (credited) medal deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, such a bet operation is detected by the bet switch 6S described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the bet operation of the player. The bet button may be used as long as it can detect the betting operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1-bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button on which two medals are bet may be separately provided.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a start lever 7 that receives a player's start operation for starting the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by the start switch 7S described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S form a start operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the start operation of the player. The start lever only needs to be able to detect the start operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and includes each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R for receiving a player's stop operation for stopping each rotation. Further, such a start operation is detected by the stop switch 8S described later. Therefore, each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitutes a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the stop operation of the player. The stop button may be used as long as it can detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a settlement button 9 for accepting a player's settlement operation (return operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. Further, such a settlement operation is detected by the settlement switch 9S described later. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player. The settlement button may be used as long as it can detect the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed.

[1-1-5-5. Button for production]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes effect buttons 10a and 10b for receiving the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that such an effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each effect button. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switch constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the effect operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but they can be configured without any of them, or only one of them can be provided. can. Further, it can be configured to provide three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the effect button are to change the effect mode when executing a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect described later), to perform a selection / decision operation in a user menu described later, and the like. Therefore, it can be configured to provide an effect button according to the intended use. For example, in the former use, the effect buttons 10a and 10b are used, and in the latter use, the above-mentioned touch panel may be used. In addition, in order to use it for the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like capable of accepting selection / determination operations as another effect button.

[1-1-6. Medal payment exit]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal payout outlet 11 for discharging medals to be paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1. When a prize is generated and the medal is paid out, the medal payout exit 11 gives the player the medal paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. Therefore, the medal is given to the player. It can be said that it is a part of the means. In addition, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal tray 12 for storing medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage unit (means) capable of storing the given game value. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-1-8. Lumbar panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist panel 13 composed of a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically indicates to the player what kind of model the pachislot machine 1 is, but for example, depending on the lighting mode of the waist lamp or the waist panel 13 itself. Can also be configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect by configuring the image with an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display unit]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an information display device 14 that displays information about the game according to its lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) capable of displaying information related to the game.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. When the start lamp lights up, it indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7. The replay lamp lights up to indicate that the medal has been automatically inserted due to the operation of the replay. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of medals credited according to the lighting mode. The payout number lamp displays the number of medals paid out (number of payouts) according to the game result depending on the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display unit) and a section lamp (status display unit). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, AT state), so that the information of the stop operation is notified. Is displayed. The "mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" is, for example, the push order (in this embodiment, this may be described as "hit order") "1st (first stop operation). When notifying the reel 3L) ”, the numerical value“ 1 ”is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order“ 2nd (performing the first stop operation to the reel 3C) ”is notified. Displays the numerical value "2" on the instruction monitor, and displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3R)". That is. The notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp may be used to display information on the stop operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, under the situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later (for example, the main effect display unit 21). Not only that, the information of the stop operation is also notified in the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. The mode of notification in the main side notification means and the mode of notification in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notifying means may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be specified depending on the player. On the other hand, the sub-side notifying means may directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main effect display unit 21 may directly notify the instruction information for causing the reel 3L to perform the first stop operation.

In addition, the section lamp lights up to indicate that the current state is in the advantageous section described later. For example, when the section lamp shifts from the non-advantageous section described later to the advantageous section, the section lamp lights up at an arbitrary timing until the game of the advantageous section starts, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. At that time, the light is turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game of the non-advantageous section is started. The lighting timing of the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when shifting from the effect section (normally advantageous section) described later in the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section to the increase section (AT state) described later in the advantageous section for the first time, any game until the game of the increase section is started. It may be turned on at the timing. That is, the section ramp may indicate that the section is in the advantageous section regardless of whether it is the production section or the increase section, or at least the advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section. It may inform the period until the end of.

Further, the limit lamp indicates that the limit processing described later has been executed or the possibility thereof depending on the lighting mode. For example, by turning on the light when the limit process is executed, it is notified to the player that the state advantageous to the player (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, blinking when the execution of the limit processing is near indicates that the advantageous state is likely to be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit processing. In addition to these, by providing an opportunity to turn on, blink, or turn off, other information regarding limit processing can be appropriately reported.

[1-1-10. Production display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 for displaying the effect image. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) capable of performing the effect display. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from a visual point of view to the player.

The main effect display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays an effect via the effect display window UD1. Further, the main display device 210 includes a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and irradiation from the irradiation unit B. It is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device C that causes an image to appear when irradiated with light. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful effect display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible to perform an effect from a visual point of view to the player, and it can be configured as a liquid crystal display device, an image display device such as an organic EL, a display device such as a 7-segment LED, a sub reel, or the like. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from such a viewpoint, the shape, arrangement, size and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is, for example, a game that is mainly entertained by a so-called roll, the main effect display unit 21 may not be provided (sub effect display unit). 22 is the same).

The sub-effect display unit 22 includes a sub-display device 220. Further, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Similar to the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can be configured as another image display device or display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from such a viewpoint, the shape, arrangement, size and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, since the main effect display unit 21 is composed of a large screen, it mainly displays effects closely related to the current game such as push order notification, hit notification, continuous effect, etc., and is a sub effect display unit. Since 22 is composed of a small screen, it is possible to display the display contents separately according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying an effect that is not so closely related to the current game such as a game history. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the two effect display units of the main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 are provided, but they can be configured without any of these. It can also be configured to provide only one of them. Further, it may be configured to provide three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes not only its light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, or extinguishing, but also its brightness and light emitting color when configured as a full-color LED, like the upper lamp 23 mentioned as an example. ) Is provided with one or more lamps (light emitting means) capable of producing the effect. Further, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from a visual point of view to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end faces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation units provided in each operation unit. Lamps and the like can be mentioned. Since the latter includes a function of notifying the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, the light emitting mode is not changed according to the content of the effect when such a function is exerted. , It can be controlled to emit light according to a unique light emitting mode.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects and sounds such as BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute an audio output means capable of producing an effect by outputting audio. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from the auditory point of view to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an effect device other than the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means). For example, it is possible to provide an effect device such as a movable effect device such as a so-called accessory, a vibration effect device that produces an effect by vibration, or an air effect device that produces an effect by injecting air, and execute the effect. That is, a production device capable of appealing to any of the player's five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, taste, and smell) (making the player recognizable that the production is being performed). If so, any of them can be used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "execution of the effect" means that the effect is produced by using one or more of the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means), unless otherwise specified. Indicates that you may execute.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S described later and a distribution device.

The medal sensor 31S detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5, and determines whether or not the detected medals are appropriate medals. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal and the medal can be accepted, the distribution device moves the medal to the hopper device 32 side, which will be described later. The drive is controlled so as to be guided. In this case, the number of bets or the number of credits is added by 1. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, or when the medal cannot be accepted, the distribution device passes the medal through the cancel shoot to the medal payout exit 11. It is driven and controlled so that it can be returned from. If an abnormality occurs in the medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, the medal jam).

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted game medium. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether or not the inserted game medium is appropriate. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a distribution means for storing the inserted game medium inside when it is appropriate, and discharging it to the outside when the inserted game medium is not appropriate. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 is provided at, for example, a bucket portion for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and medals stored at the bottom of the bucket portion while stirring the medals. It has a disc unit that guides the medals to the discharge unit one by one, a discharge unit that discharges the medals guided by the disc unit one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge unit.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. The medals exceeding a certain number are guided to the medal auxiliary storage 33, which will be described later, through the guide passage provided on the upper surface side. If the medals stored in the bucket are empty, a hopper empty error will occur. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after replenishing the medals.

A plurality of medal-shaped hollow portions are formed radially from the center of the disc portion, and the central axis is rotationally driven according to a drive signal to guide the medals fitted in the hollow portions to the discharge portion one by one. The rotation of the disk portion agitates the medals stored in the bucket portion. Further, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk portion, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, the medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals ejected from the ejection unit and counts the number of medals. For example, when paying out one medal, the disc unit starts to rotate, and then the rotation of the disc unit stops according to the count sensor counting the payout of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium payout unit (means) capable of paying out the game medium. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is a part of the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be appropriately changed. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-3. Medal auxiliary storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 is, for example, a storage unit for storing medals guided from the bucket portion of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage provided in the vicinity of the storage portion to detect the capacity of the medals stored in the storage unit. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage unit is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. When it is determined by the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S that a certain number or more of the medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage unit to at least a certain number.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage unit (means) capable of storing the surplus game medium. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power supply switch 34b, and supplies electric power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power supply switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, as in the case of household electric products. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required electric power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key type switch 52 and the reset switch 53 described later are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described later). The switch can also be configured to be provided in the power supply device 34.

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as boards required for various controls. It should be noted that each of the substrates shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include a substrate different from these, or may be configured not to include a substrate that is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted on the back side of the reel unit RU in the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or substantially transparent) so that its state can be visually recognized. Is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

There are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and basically various electronic components are DIP-mounted, but some or all of the various electronic components are SMT-mounted (surface mount). It may be configured (implemented). Further, in this case, a test point for confirming the operation may be provided using a tester or an oscilloscope. Further, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for a part or all of various electronic components. Further, the substrate surface of the main control board 71 may be multi-layered.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back surface side of the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls the effect, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or another material configured to be opaque (or substantially opaque). It can also be configured as a case using. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is mainly controlled by various devices connected to the main relay board 73. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a board different from the main control board 71 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the main relay board 73 are mainly controlled unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to provide the main relay board 73 on the board 71 without providing the main relay board 73. Further, from such a viewpoint, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Secondary relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is between various devices and the like connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board different from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the sub-relay board 74 are sub-controlled if there is no particular problem. It is also possible to support the board 72 without providing the auxiliary relay board 74. Further, from such a viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the inner side of the lower space), and for example, signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal are transmitted. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be appropriately set, and the transition of the internal state (for example, bonus state or AT state) of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set to the outside according to the game playability. It is possible to inform. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display or hall computer, not only the status of inserting / paying medals and the status of error occurrence in the pachi-slot machine 1 also in these devices. , The transition status of such an internal state can be recognized.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1. (Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachislot machine 1 as a release product for sale, the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board for the testing machine. The various electronic components needed to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74, and the sub relay board 74 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Further, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are electrically operated so as to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74. Is connected.

The main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls the game is mounted on the main control board 71. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control related to the overall game operation is performed.

On the sub-control board 72, a sub-control circuit 200 as an effect control unit that controls the effect is mounted. The sub control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub control board 72. On the ROM cartridge board 202, various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, various effect data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc. Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub RAM 203 has a storage area for registering the effect contents and various effect data determined by executing the control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like. It will be provided. The random number value for production related to the production may be generated and extracted in the sub CPU 201 from random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or may be main control. A random number circuit may be provided in the same manner as the circuit 100 so that the generation and extraction may be performed. Further, the sub ROM may be included in the sub control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various effect data, and the sub ROM in the sub control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 includes a microprocessor dedicated to images such as a GPU (also referred to as “VDP”), whereby the image displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220 is displayed. May be configured to generate (edit).

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, role ratio monitoring device 54, external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and power supply. The device 34 is electrically connected. Further, on the main control board 71, a door open / close monitoring switch 56, a medal sensor 31S, a bet switch 6S, a start switch 7S, a stop switch 8S, a settlement switch 9S, and an information display device 14 are electrically connected via the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. If the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via, for example, the main relay board 73.

The external centralized terminal board 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, the power supply device 34, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, the information display device 14, and the testing machine. Since the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio, and is driven by the gear to rotate and stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Since each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, the main CPU 101 is a stepping motor 51L, respectively. The number of times the pulse is output to the 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol positions of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are managed based on the count result. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines an initial position for performing such management, and an index sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the reel index. ..

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, setting 1 to setting 6 in 6 steps) (setting change) or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). Used for. Here, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage regarding the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the relative the degree of the player's advantage. The lower the value and the higher the setting value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of the player's advantage is. The setting key type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the administrator of the game store inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it from the state where it is turned counterclockwise to the initial position. And turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is off, the setting can be changed by turning on the setting key type switch 52 and then turning on the power, and the setting can be made while the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 remains on. When the key type switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the administrator on the game store side. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. Further, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value determination operation by the administrator on the game store side in a state where the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where the setting can be changed, the set value is sequentially increased by 1 each time the setting is changed (when the setting 6 is reached, the setting returns to the next setting 1). In this way, the set value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is subsequently operated once. That is, the start switch 7S can detect the set value confirmation operation by the administrator on the game store side. In this way, when changing the setting, the setting key type switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select the set value, and the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected set value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and it can be configured so that the setting can be changed by another operation. Further, when changing the setting or confirming the setting, for example, the current setting value may be displayed on the above-mentioned credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

The role ratio monitoring device 54 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The combination ratio monitoring device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information is used when the manager of the game store confirms whether or not the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with. The role ratio monitoring device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. You may. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Further, even if the display in the combination ratio monitoring device 54 is started or a management switch for switching the contents thereof is provided in the cabinet G so that the above-mentioned various ratio information is displayed when this is operated. good. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitoring device 54. Further, immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds, which is a buffer time considering the time required for starting the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200) has elapsed from the power on, the role ratio monitoring device 54 In order to make it possible to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning normally, a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all seg and desimal LEDs are lit) is specified. It is desirable to have a configuration that lights (or blinks) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of the ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous character ratio information and character ratio information between the latest 6000 games, and cumulative continuous character ratio information. And there is information on the proportion of characters.

The specific section ratio information is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player in the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games if it is "cumulative", 6000 games if it is "most recent 6000 games", and the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games (or the number of games in the advantageous section) in the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information of the above was notified. Further, the continuous bonus ratio information is the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, and the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation (consecutive bonuses related to the first-class special bonus). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to (including the operation of the first-class special accessory (RB) in the state where the actuating device (BB) is operating). In addition, the bonus ratio information includes the first-class special bonus (RB), the second-class special bonus (CB), and the ordinary bonus (SB) among the medals paid out in the game section of the target game number. ) Is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation, and here, the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB) is the continuous operation device for the first-class special bonus (RB). It is a concept including the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB) in the state where the BB) is operating, and the operation of the second-class special bonus (CB) is the second-class special bonus. It is a concept including the operation of the type 2 special accessory (CB) in the state where the accessory continuous actuating device (MB) is operating.

It should be noted that the game section (for example, the AT state) in which the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player was notified is regarded as the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and in each ratio information. It can also be the target of aggregation / calculation. That is, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may only appropriately display the necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. Further, for example, when displaying the continuous character ratio information on a model not equipped with the first-class special accessory (RB), or displaying the specific section ratio information on a model not equipped with the advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information), such as when displaying, the last two digits that display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED when displaying the item. In the 7-segment LED of No. 1, for example, by displaying the identification for non-correspondence information such as lighting and displaying the two vertical bars in the center, it is confirmed that the model does not have the correspondence information. It is desirable that the person can recognize it at a glance.

The door open / close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the open / close side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may be configured to be provided with a similar door open / close monitoring switch. The door open / close monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state and turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, thereby monitoring the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD. When the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is turned on, a door open error occurs. In this case, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the error state is canceled.

The ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. Further, the sub-control board 72 has a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of production buttons such as effect buttons 10a and 10b, lamps / LEDs such as upper lamps 23, and speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74. Such speakers are electrically connected.

Since the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, the effect button group, the lamps / LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, the description thereof is omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the opening / closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door opening / closing monitoring switch 56. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 is the same as the door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has a function of monitoring the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD. The opening / closing history of the door mechanism DD can be stored for a certain period of time. The opening / closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is an opening history after the manager of the game store leaves after business hours, or if there is an opening / closing history that has been opened for a long time during business hours, this is illegal. It is possible to recognize that the act is likely to have taken place.

[3. Function flow of pachislot machine]
Subsequently, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When a medal is inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 by the player (bet operation is performed) and the start lever 7 is operated (start operation is performed), a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is used. One random number value (in the present embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted.

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number values, and determines the internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed on the valid line is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. In addition, the role related to the payout of medals is called "small role", the role related to the operation of replay (replay) is called "replay role", and the role related to the operation of bonus (bonus state) is called "bonus role". Refer to. In addition, a combination that can be won internally (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) may be simply referred to as a "role". In addition, the internal winning combination may be referred to as a "winning combination", a "preliminary decision result", a "derivation allowable condition", or the like. Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determination means", a "winning combination determination means", a "preliminary determination means", a "deriving allowable condition determination means", or the like.

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (each reel 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described later). The main CPU 101) that performs the reel stop control process controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the pressing order thereof) when the stop button is pressed. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, and any operation means can be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to those having a button shape such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and any operation as long as the player can perform the stop operation. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually has the combination of the symbols valid within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible on the top. Further, the reel stop control means uses a specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed on the effective line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. The stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels will be stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the winning operation determination processing described later) has a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line related to the winning. (Or other predetermined ones) is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning (or the combination of other predetermined symbols) is established. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as an example, one game (unit game) is performed in the above-mentioned series of flows.

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means is applicable. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently guaranteed, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning is the combination of the symbols for which the winning is permitted. Can be detected, so it is possible to improve security.

Further, in the pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, the display of the image by the display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, etc.) and the light by various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.) Output, sound output from a speaker (for example, speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these is used to perform various effects. That is, these are effect execution means for executing the effect. The content of the effect executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). That is, any of these can be a means for determining the content of the production.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the effect random value is extracted separately from the internal lottery random value. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means selects the effect to be executed this time from the plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination (or according to a predetermined determination condition). decide.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel rotation starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, by executing the effect content associated with the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determined (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at, the push order to be operated, etc.). The opportunity to know or anticipate is provided to the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a specification in which a game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and a stop display. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so that it can be grasped which symbol is arranged at which position in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, in the main ROM 102, at least data for identifying the type of the symbol at each symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stored. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotation direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. In addition, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". The number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like can be appropriately changed and specified.

[4-2. Symbol combination]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the specifications are such that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 grants various benefits according to the combination of the displayed symbols, shifts from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or changes from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state. It is possible to make a transition. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp such a combination of symbols. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a combination of symbols. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described later is used as an example thereof. ing.

The symbol combination table defines data (for example, "display combination" or "winning operation flag") indicating the types of combinations of a plurality of predetermined symbols among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the valid line. ing. The symbols constituting each combination of symbols can be specified by using, for example, the above-mentioned symbol code or the like. In addition, data indicating the type of privilege or the like (for example, "payout or the like") is associated with each combination of symbols. Further, the symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. In addition, the number of types of combinations of symbols, the content of granting benefits, etc. can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is a specification that which combination of symbols is permitted to be displayed (whether it is determined in advance) affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of privilege that can be granted)) prior to the player's stop operation (in advance). It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp such an internal winning combination. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such an internal winning combination. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the internal lottery table, data indicating a plurality of predetermined types of internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number") and a lottery value at which each internal winning combination is determined in each game state are displayed. Is stipulated. The lottery value may vary depending on the set value. In addition, the types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding) for each internal winning combination are associated with each other. In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to associate a combination of a plurality of symbols with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which combination of symbols is displayed. Is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process described later in the present embodiment (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, in the range of numerical values predetermined by the random number circuit (for example, 0). The random number values extracted from ~ 65535) are sequentially added and updated with the lottery values specified for each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in the predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is awarded (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after making the determination, the internal winning combination in this game is "missing". It should be noted that this is just an example of the internal lottery process, and as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability), various methods can be adopted for the lottery process. For example, the extracted random value is sequentially subtracted and updated with the lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (lottery result underflows). Whether or not) may be determined to determine the internal winning combination.

As described above, in the internal lottery table, the probability of being determined (the winning probability) increases as the value of the specified lottery value is larger. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning combination, which symbol combination is finally displayed by the player's stop operation is the game result. It is a specification that affects. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 is finally displayed not only by the determined type of internal winning combination, but also by the player's stop operation timing and push order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to change (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be performed. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning combination according to the stop operation mode of the player. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a stop control mode. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown), or the like is used as an example. There is.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbol (for example, "number of sliding pieces") is defined for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For example, it is assumed that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Then, it is assumed that the number of sliding pieces specified in the symbol position data "0" is "4" in the predetermined stop table. Then, the main control circuit 100 controls so that the reel 3L is stopped (the scheduled stop position becomes "4") at the symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") moved by four symbols. In this way, the stop table defines data (number of slip pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. It should be noted that such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control".

If there are multiple combinations of symbols that are allowed to be displayed in the attraction priority table, data indicating which combination of symbols should be displayed preferentially (retraction) (for example, "retraction priority"). ") Is stipulated. For example, it is assumed that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of the symbol combination A and the symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table is attracted so that the symbol combination B is displayed with priority over the symbol combination A. Priority shall be specified. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position is "0".

Then, in the main control circuit 100, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position, the symbol constituting the symbol combination A and the symbol constituting the symbol combination B are displayed. Search for the existence. If there are no symbols on both sides, the position to stop is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stop at a closer position, stop at a farther position, etc.). If there is only a symbol constituting the symbol combination A, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there is only a symbol constituting the symbol combination B, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there are both symbols, the symbol combination B is displayed with priority over the symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols constituting the symbol combination B. The pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions during rotation of the target reel according to the selected pull-in priority table, or a stop operation may be performed on the target reel. When it is broken, it may be stored for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position. Moreover, such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control".

In the present embodiment, the stop control may be executed by performing only the "table control", or the stop control may be executed by performing only the "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to tentatively determine the stop position, then perform "control control" to search for a more appropriate stop position, and change the stop position depending on the search result. It is also possible to configure the configuration to execute the stop control that enables the operation.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the effective line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "missing", the combination of symbols related to any of the replay combinations, the combination of symbols related to the small combination, or the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is finally on the valid line. It will not be displayed. It should be noted that the "missing" can be regarded as one of the internal winning combinations, or can be regarded as a lottery result in which the internal winning combination has not been determined.

The second element is the stop operation timing of the player (the position of the symbol (pressing position) when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, display is permitted even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery processing. If the symbols that make up the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of four effective lines (or each effective line if there are multiple), the combination of the symbols depends on the stop operation timing of the player. May not be displayed. This is the so-called "missing".

The third element is the push order of the player (the order in which the player operates the stop button). For example, in the present embodiment, an internal winning combination to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is associated may be determined, and in this case, it is finally displayed on the effective line according to the pushing order of the player. The combination of symbols may vary. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a "pushing order role", and if it is a replay role, it may be called a "pushing order replay", and if it is a small role, it is called a "pushing order small role". May be called.

[4-5. Game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, various gaming states can be provided as states for playing a game in order to change the degree of advantage of the player or to obtain the intended game performance. Hereinafter, an example of the gaming state will be described.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is possible to configure a plurality of bonus states. When a bonus combination is won, a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination (carry-over state) occurs over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role". In addition, such a carry-over state may be referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)".

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode of the small winning combination (including the winning probability and its contents, the mode of stop control, etc., the same applies hereinafter) with respect to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Since it is also possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

As bonus roles, for example, a first-class special bonus (RB), a continuous bonus role related to a first-class special bonus (BB), and a second-class special bonus (CB) (but not a carry-over role). , A bonus continuous actuating device (MB) related to a second-class special bonus, an ordinary bonus (SB) (but not a carry-over role), and the like. Further, for example, the bonus state corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) is played. It is composed. The BB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals to be paid out (for example, the upper limit is 285) is paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when the number of medals to be paid out exceeds an arbitrary predetermined number (for example, the upper limit is 153), or when the RB or SB is won during the MB state. To. The SB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played.

The operating condition of the bonus state is not limited to the fact that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. For example, during the operation of the bonus continuous actuating device (BB) related to the first-class special bonus, when the operation of the bonus continuous actuation device (BB) related to the first-class special bonus is started, the first-class special bonus It can also be configured to automatically activate the first-class special bonus (RB) at the start of the game when the object is not in operation, or at the end of the first-class special bonus. That is, it is also possible to control so that the RB is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB in operation of BB may be referred to as "JAC" or the like, and the specification in which the RB in operation of BB is automatically operated in this way may be referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to control the operation of the RB when the combination of symbols related to the specified RB is displayed on the effective line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the combination of the corresponding symbols is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous actuating device (MB) related to the type 2 special accessory and the type 2 special accessory (CB) is also the same. That is, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is operating without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the CB, and during the operation of the MB, the specified symbol related to the CB can be controlled. It is also possible to control the operation of the CB when the combination is displayed on the effective line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the RT state (operate the RT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an RT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be changed with respect to the state in which the RT state is not operating (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode (particularly, the winning probability) of the replay role is relatively advantageous to the player is called "high RT state" or "high probability replay state", and the lottery of the replay role is performed. An RT state in which the aspect (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state", a "low probability replay state", or the like.

The RT state can be transferred, for example, by satisfying any of the following transition conditions. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When winning RB, BB or MB (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and is not in the RB state, BB state or MB state (5) (3) or (4) When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition of

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the AT state (operate the AT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an AT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of AT states. The AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not operating (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on the stop operation advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned push order combination is won. It is a gaming state configured as a state.

In addition, when a plurality of AT states are provided, the game period of each AT state (including the ease of extension when it is possible to extend the period (or "addition"; the same applies hereinafter)). The degree of advantage of the player can be varied by setting the type of the notification target combination to which the information of the stop operation is notified, the probability of occurrence of the notification of the information of the stop operation, and the like different from each other. Further, the transition condition and the end condition of the AT state can be appropriately set according to the playability (however, the end by executing the limit process described later is excluded). Further, the AT state may be treated as if it were the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

Further, the game period in the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of games) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game number management), and the predetermined number of games is set as one set and the number of sets. It may be managed by (set number management). Further, it may be managed by the number of payouts or the net increase (difference number) in the AT state (payout number management, difference number management). Further, it may be managed by the number of times (navigation number of times) that the notification (for example, the push order navigation at the time of winning the push order small winning combination) that affects the payout of medals is performed in the AT state (navigation number management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Further, the game period given when the AT state is changed may be managed by a management method different from the game period given when the AT state is extended. Further, when a plurality of AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or may be managed by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (operate the ART state). That is, since the ART state means the AT state performed in the high RT state, at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as the RT state, and the state is shifted to the high RT state (or to the low RT state). Although it differs from the AT state in that the control is performed (the transition is avoided), the basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being notified of the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player). If it shifts to a state (or avoids shifting to a low RT state), it can be said to be synonymous with an AT state). When the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the state may be changed to the ART state by first shifting to the AT state and then to the high RT state, or at the same time in the high RT state and the AT state ( Alternatively, it may shift to the ART state by shifting to (almost simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other game status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, a gaming state other than the above-mentioned various gaming states can be provided. For example, each mode (see FIGS. 5 and 6) in the advantageous section described later is also a state in which the player plays a game, and it is advantageous whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be regarded as a gaming state. Further, from the same viewpoint, for example, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the bonus state can be changed. For example, when the bonus combination is won (carried over), the game state in which the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is easily displayed by the stop control and the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination are relative to each other. It is also possible to configure the player so that the degree of advantage can be changed by providing a gaming state that is difficult to be displayed in. Further, for example, a gaming state in which the bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a gaming state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) are provided. Therefore, it can be configured so that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied.

In addition, the following method is adopted as a method that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state (including whether or not to extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state. The same applies hereinafter). You can also do it. For example, a "specific role" can be determined as an internal winning combination. The number of medals awarded to the specific combination varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing, push order, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 cards are paid out, and if inappropriate (incorrect answer), 1 card is paid out or not paid out).

Then, if the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, whether or not to change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state in this game to an advantageous one. (It may also include a decision on whether or not to directly shift to the AT state or whether or not to directly extend the gaming period in the AT state. Hereinafter, it will be described as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-mentioned specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in this game.

In this way, when the player plays a game by a specific game method, the advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and the advantageous decision is not made (the limitation is that the advantageous decision is made). It can also be configured to be) in some cases. In addition, the player may change between this game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions are limited to this game and will not continue after the next game. Also, such restrictions are sometimes referred to as "penalties".

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as a state in which the game is played with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. Hereinafter, an example of the game section will be described. The game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is not possible to notify the player of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and can be changed as appropriate if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section (that is, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter described later). When the value) becomes a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. In addition, the non-advantageous section may be set on the condition that the predetermined value is referred to and the predetermined value is a specific update value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value. In addition, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, when the advantageous section end lottery is configured to be performed and the winning is won, etc.), that is the condition. A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the processing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section) can be derived only by referring to the determined internal winning combination. It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before the transition). In addition, which internal winning combination is determined can be referred to the data indicating the internal winning combination directly such as the winning number, or the sub-flag (multiple roles) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to the data indicating the internal winning combination indirectly, such as (the data in which is used as one determination target data).
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and a plurality of states cannot be set in the non-advantageous section. For example, the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section cannot be set as the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section after the setting change cannot be set as the non-advantageous section B.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and can be changed as appropriate if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section, it is necessary to end the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, the process related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section, or whether to extend a specific gaming state (mode), etc.) is performed. , Not only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also the processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous section can be performed. .. As other examples of various parameters that can be referred to, for example, privilege information such as points that can be given according to the above-mentioned various parameters, type of bonus state, type of RT state, stop operation timing of any reel. , Or the push order and the like.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase becomes positive when the stop operation is performed according to the notification. Further, for example, in response to the determination of the transition to the CZ state in the normal state, the CZ precursor is set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state is actually performed, and a precursor effect suggesting the transition to the CZ state can be performed. Depending on whether the AT state transition is determined in the state, the normal state, or the CZ state, it is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state, and a precursory effect suggesting the transition to the AT state can be performed. The state such as the AT precursor state can also be set according to the playability.
(6) By lighting the section lamp (status display unit) that can notify which section is the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section, it is possible to notify that the section is in the advantageous section (the section lamp is off). If so, it can be notified that the section is in a non-advantageous section). As described above, the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to any timing to some extent. Basically, the lighting may be started when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section and may be continued until the non-advantageous section shifts, or the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section (the advantageous section starts). However, if the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, but the lighting may be started from the time when the AT state is first reached. If the shifted advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, an upper limit (limit) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues continuously. Is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Further, in the present embodiment, ending the advantageous section by such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or operation of the limiter. Hereinafter, an example of the limiter will be described.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter in which limit processing is executed when the number of games (number of games) in the advantageous section reaches "1500" times. For example, the advantageous section game number counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the time when the advantageous section is started, and adds one count each time one game is digested. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section game number counter becoming a specified value (for example, "1500" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated can be set to any number as long as the number of games is "1500" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such a game number limiter are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of games in the advantageous section.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter in which the limit process is executed when the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time a medal is paid out, the corresponding number of medals (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). (Several minutes) Add the count. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section payout counter becoming a specified value (for example, "2400" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of payouts for which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any number as long as the number of payouts is "2400" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such payout limiters are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section.

Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, counts the plus amount from the latest lowest point, with the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point). (That is, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). That is, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from the time when the number of medals increases in the advantageous section (for example, when the AT state is started). It can also be configured as a limiter to be used. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the payout number does not subtract the bet number) instead of the net increase number described above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of payout limiters, and may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of payout limiters. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be executed by using both of the number limiters. When both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating conditions of either limiter are satisfied after the advantageous section starts.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of times of navigating the push order small combination in the AT state (that is, the number of times when the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified about the combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). A navigation count limiter may be provided so that the limit process is executed when the limiter is reached. That is, it is possible to execute the limit process using various conditions related to the game as long as the gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has specifications that can output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display can also be turned on. It is possible to perform an effect during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the MB state is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of the MB state, the external data display not only performs the above-mentioned effect during the bonus state, but also gives a bonus. The number of times can be counted by the type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the AT state, the external data display can also be used. In conjunction with this, it is possible to perform an effect during the AT state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the predetermined AT state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is set. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the start and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of a specific AT state, the external data display is also in the above-mentioned AT state. Not only can the effect be performed, but the number of ATs can be counted for each type.

Further, for example, the AT state is configured as the AT state for managing the number of sets, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state of the first first set, and the set is started for the second and subsequent sets. If the external signal 2 is turned on each time, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted even in the external data display. The timing of turning on and the timing of turning off each external signal can be appropriately set. That is, as long as the situation is appropriately recognized by an external data display, a hall computer, or the like, the output mode of each external signal can be appropriately set. For example, various conditions such as a predetermined time, one game, and a change in the state can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that a plurality of types of commands can be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is a requirement that the main control circuit 100 communicates only in one direction of the sub control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to transmit information (command) for notifying the change of the state in the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub control circuit 200 in a timely manner. An example of such a command will be described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command is configured to include parameters that specify setting values, game states, and the like. Further, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination, a game state, and the like. Further, for example, a lock command is transmitted when a lock effect is performed. The lock command is configured to include parameters that specify the content of the lock effect and the like. Further, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command is configured to include parameters that specify that the reel rotation has started and the like.

Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters for specifying the reel to be stopped, the position where the reel is stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning operation flag) is confirmed, the winning operation command is transmitted. The winning operation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of display combination, the content of the privilege to be given, and the like. Further, for example, when starting an advantageous section, an advantageous section start command is transmitted. The advantageous section start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous section, the mode (game state), and the like. Further, for example, when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command is configured to include parameters for specifying the end of the advantageous section and the factors for ending the advantageous section. Further, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is transmitted. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns and the like. Note that these are just examples, and commands other than these can be sent as needed, and unnecessary commands can be prevented from being sent.

[4-10. Direction]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various effects are executed by using various effect devices in order to enhance the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to make the game playable as intended. It is possible. Hereinafter, an example of such an effect will be described.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the information of the stop operation by the instruction monitor, which is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the progress of the game can be stopped for a predetermined period (the player's game operation is invalidated for a predetermined period). Such an effect is referred to as a "rock effect (or simply" rock ")", or is also referred to as a "freeze effect (or simply" freeze ")" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a lock effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of lock effects can be performed.

Further, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, when the start operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after all the stop operations are performed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after the start operation is performed. In addition, when a plurality of types of lock effects are provided, a period during which the progress of the game is stopped (a period during which the player's game operation is invalidated), a type of game operation to be invalidated, etc. are set for each lock effect. You can do it.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only the variable display mode but also the stop display mode) is combined during the execution of the lock effect described above. Can be performed by). Such an effect is referred to as a "reel effect" as well as a "design effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a reel effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the reel effect is performed and the case where the reel effect is not performed.

In short, the reel effect is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R regardless of the player's game operation during the period when the player's game operation is invalidated. It is intended to produce with. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern for performing such an effect operation without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like. Further, if a plurality of operation patterns are set, a plurality of types of reel effects can be provided. Further, a wider range of effect patterns can be set by combining a plurality of types of reel effects and a plurality of types of lock effects. It should be noted that only any one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effect, any two may be used, or all three may be used.

(Pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect of performing a pseudo game during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such a production is called a "pseudo game". It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of pseudo games can be performed. Further, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the pseudo game is performed and the case where the pseudo game is not performed.

In short, the pseudo game receives the player's game operation in a pseudo manner during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The production is done by doing things like that. That is, the above-mentioned reel effect is further produced by intervening the game operation of the player. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, start lever 7, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement button 9, etc. are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operation. Therefore, it is not desirable to use it for any other purpose. However, in the simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken so that the player does not misunderstand that the game is actually being played.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be described with an example. The pseudo game is performed, for example, in the following flow.
(1) The actual start operation of the player (the execution condition is satisfied here and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) A pseudo stop operation is accepted, which causes each reel to temporarily stop (during a pseudo game).
(4) Each reel actually starts rotating after undergoing random delay processing (pseudo-game ends and actual game starts).

The random delay process is, for example, a state in which specific symbols are displayed side by side in the situation (3) described above, and when each reel starts normal rotation in the situation (4) described above as it is, the player However, it may be easier to stop the operation using a specific symbol as a mark (it becomes an aid to so-called "pressing"), so in order to correct this, a delay period is randomly set for each reel. It is a process for starting rotation after it is generated (such a delay period is also referred to as a "relocation period"). Further, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situations (3) and (4), the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always predetermined so as not to be mistaken for being completely stopped. It is desirable to alternate the reels forward and backward for less than an hour (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation of (3) above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all the reels are temporarily stopped). In the situation (4) described above, each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay processing is started. As long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such fluctuation does not occur when the first reel temporarily stops and when the second reel temporarily stops. You may do it.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is provided, and after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), the above-mentioned (4). ), The pseudo-game lamp may be turned on until the random delay process is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp is installed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo-game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp is covered with a monochromatic edge. Further, it is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm) including the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game lamp. Further, the description portion of the pseudo-game lamp is a description that can be recognized as a lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game lamp is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "during pseudo-game production", or ". It is desirable that the description such as "during automatic reel production"), and it is desirable that such a description portion occupies 1/3 or more of the surface area. The pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game in-game display for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is displayed after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), and then the above-mentioned (4). ), The main display device 210 and / or the sub display device 220 may be used until the random delay processing is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game display is displayed above the operation unit that receives the player's game operation and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game (in the present embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device). Since all of the 220s are above the operation unit, any of them may be used). Further, in the simulated game display, the display range including the explanation portion has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and when the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm. , When the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen, etc.). Further, the explanation portion of the pseudo-game display is a description that can be recognized as a display for notifying that the pseudo-game display is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", etc. Alternatively, it is desirable that the description is "during automatic reel production" or the like), and it is desirable that the size is such that the player can read it without concealing it.

Further, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the situation (1) described above to the start of the random delay process in the situation (4) described above), the instruction monitor is displayed. It is desirable to configure so that the stop operation information is not notified (when it is necessary to display the stop operation information on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). By doing so, it is possible to further suppress the player's misunderstanding that the game is actually being played during the simulated game. If any of the above measures are taken, the stop operation information may be notified to the sub-side effect device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220) during the simulated game. good. Similarly, during the pseudo-game, the effect device on the sub-side may perform an effect (linked to the pseudo-game operation) according to the game result of the pseudo-game.

Further, in the actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during the simulated game. Does not output a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo-game operation or the state in which the pseudo-game operation is possible. Therefore, during the simulated game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) may be output so that the testing machine can recognize that the simulated game is in progress. When the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives the pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 outputs the signal for pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the first interface board 301 is simulated on the main control board 71 side. The game may be advanced (that is, the first interface board 301 for the testing machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). Further, when the first interface board 301 for a testing machine is provided with such a pseudo game progress function, a changeover switch capable of switching on / off of the function may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the effect content of the pseudo game in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the stop operation information by the main display device 210 or the like, which is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Normal production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect that is completed in this game (that is, it ends in one game). Such an effect is referred to as a "normal effect" as well as a "single-shot effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a normal effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a continuous (that is, continuous for a plurality of games) effect can be performed over a plurality of games. Such an effect is referred to as a "continuous reading effect" as well as a "continuous effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such continuous production is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of continuous production can be performed.

(Operation interlocking production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect capable of changing the effect content according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is referred to as an "operation-linked effect" and also called a "button effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Further, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect or a continuous effect. Further, the effect operation can include not only the operation for the effect button group but also various game operations.

The above-mentioned various effects can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or notify a set value, an internal winning combination, a game state, a game section, a content of granting a privilege, a period until the privilege is granted, and the like. Further, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Moreover, these uses are just an example.

(Other production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to perform an effect other than the above-mentioned various effects. For example, various notifications to the player or the game store (for example, immersive prevention notification, forgotten item prevention notification, error status notification, demo status notification, etc.) are also included in the production in a broad sense as those used for purposes other than the above. .. In addition, the entanglement prevention notification may be, for example, a warning or the like indicating to that effect when the advantageous section ends. Further, the forgotten item prevention notification may be, for example, a warning or the like indicating to that effect when the advantageous section ends or the settlement operation is performed. Further, in the error status notification, a warning or the like indicating to that effect can be notified from the time when the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification can be notified that the table is vacant or the like when the period during which the game is not played reaches a predetermined period or when the settlement operation is performed.

[5. First game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a “first game machine”. It should be noted that, with respect to various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to those described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment. With respect to various specifications, functions, and the like described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to those described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment. That is, an invention in which these are appropriately combined can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the effective line is defined as only one line of the above-mentioned "center line". Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as the gaming state. In addition, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flags where the later-described "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in the two-card bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") is carried over, and later. "F_3BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in the state of 3 bets. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over between the 3BB flags, and neither bonus combination is won (carryover). It is configured to include between non-flags (not). Further, the bonus state is configured to include a 2BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 2BB and a 3BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 3BB. To.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game in a state where two medals are bet (two-card bet state) and a state where three medals are bet (three-card bet state). There is. The "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to use the game, and the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b. This includes both medals for two or three medals from credits, and medals for two or three medals are automatically hung by winning a replay role.

[5-1. Playability of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. Note that FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of a gaming state in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. 7 and 8 are views showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into an effect section (advantageous section / normal game) and a normal game. An increase section (advantageous section / pseudo bonus) is provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. The effect section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, which is the same as the non-advantageous section. , It differs from the non-advantageous section in that the mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is defined as an initial state controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the product is shipped from the factory. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the expected degree of increase section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition or the like, and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increase section is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the medals. It should be noted that both the effect section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by mutually shifting these sections, they are configured as a series of advantageous sections.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, the non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in the non-advantageous section. Is determined. In addition, the sub-flag plays an internal winning role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various lottery (various processes related to the advantageous section) related to playability by the main control circuit 100. It is information for making the group identifiable by grouping and assigning the same information. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, so that the amount of data can be compressed and the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Ripbell" has internal winning combinations of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2". "(No." 10 "to No." 33 "). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "weak che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "determined combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_determined cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "middle che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that the non-advantageous section can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined as in the advantageous section. Further, these correspondences are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, the advantageous section winning sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in the advantageous section. Is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, the sub flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined as the secondary information (sub flag) according to the combination of the displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning sub-flags and advantageous section winning sub-flags.

The sub-flag "bell" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of "F_bell 123A1" to "F_bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "weak che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "watermelon" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "fixed combination" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). .. The sub-flag "middle che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu Lip 1" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rising lip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising right lip"). The sub-flag "Through Lip 2" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "parallel lip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of the symbols of "right-up lip" is between the 3BB flags. It is displayed, and a combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags.

That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), "through lip 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, which is advantageous between the 2BB flags and the non-flags. "Tsu Lip 2" is determined as a sub-flag when winning a section. Then, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section are different in this way, various lottery to be described later (for example, a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery using the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) or the figure). The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8 (f) is varied.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_replay A" (No. "3") serves as a role in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags or between the 2BB flags. ) Is given as an example, but the mode in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags and the 2BB flags. Therefore, if you win such a role, the number of medals to be paid out will not be changed (or may be changed), and the combination of displayed symbols will be different. The sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), the pressing position (stop operation timing) regardless of which flag is between (non-flag). ) Is appropriate, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a dropout occurs and the combination of "watermelon spills" symbols is displayed. If the winning combination is won, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, which is different depending on whether the winning is possible without the omission occurring or the omission occurs, may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is a specific mode (in this specific mode, for example, the stop operation is defined in advance) between the 3BB flags. If it is performed in the batting order (correct answer pressing order), the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, or a combination of these, any aspect may be used). The combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific mode, the "right-up rip" symbol combination is displayed, which determines a different advantageous section winning sub-flag. You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in the first gaming machine, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, with respect to the specific combination. It is possible to apply all the modes in which different secondary information can be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (b) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, the transition destination mode or the like is determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In this determination, when only the type of the mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (“start of advantageous section” in FIG. 5), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus may be shifted. There is a case where it is decided (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to make the specifications so that it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, each mode in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may be rephrased as a gaming state or a control state) for changing the degree of expectation of an increase section (pseudo-bonus) transition (giving) in an effect section (normal game). Yes, in the production section (normal game), whether or not there is a pseudo bonus transition is determined, the advantageous section is maintained, or the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined according to this mode. It is designed to do.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (directing section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo bonus when the period of not shifting to the pseudo bonus reaches a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous to the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, the A mode is the mode in which the player is most likely to stay and is relatively disadvantageous in playing the game, and the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low ((c) in FIG. 7 described later). (See), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". Further, in FIG. 6, "about 999G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the mode shifts to the end A mode or the end B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games without shifting to the pseudo-bonus in the mode. If this normal A mode is selected when the game is played, once the game is transferred to the non-advantageous section, and then the normal A mode is selected when the game is transferred from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. Hereinafter, the same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normally B mode is a mode that is relatively easy for the player to stay in playing a game and is relatively disadvantageous, but it is a mode that is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is high. It is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). In the normal B mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), but the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo bonus. After that, it is confirmed that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later), so that the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

In the chance mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is set to "222 games", which is relatively advantageous in that sense. Mode. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the transition to the pseudo bonus, and you expect to shift to the pseudo bonus. The degree is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the end A mode, when the game of 32 games is performed without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section.

The end B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the end A mode because it is easy to stay when the transition to the pseudo bonus does not occur after the transition to the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode). Since it is a mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see the figure described later). 8 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when the game of 32 games is performed without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. The end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as the "end mode".

The guarantee mode is a mode in which the player stays when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation for shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". Since it is set to, it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). That is, when the heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent the deterioration of the interest caused by it.

The heaven A mode may also include a pseudo-bonus (in the case of a specification in which the AT state is continued by a decision to extend (add) during the AT state, the extension (addition)). It is a mode in which the same can be expected (the same applies hereinafter), the probability of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling is also expected. It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, a setting difference may be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1,3,5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2,4,6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so as to be, or the lottery value can be set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate is. The same applies to the heaven B mode and the heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which pseudo-bonus can be expected to be in a row, and the expectation of shifting to pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set high. That is, it is a mode that is even more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which you can expect a series of pseudo-bonus games, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games." It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be considerably high. That is, the mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate. The heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as the "heaven mode".

It should be noted that each of the above modes is merely an example, and the mode configuration is not limited to this. It is possible to set a mode other than each of the above-mentioned modes, or it is possible not to set some of the above-mentioned modes.

Further, up to this point, the non-advantageous section has been described as having a relatively lower advantage than the advantageous section, but the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increasing section is higher or the average number of games required to shift to the increasing section is shorter than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section. It is also possible to make a specification such as a squeeze, or a specification in which a non-advantageous section is most likely to be an increase section. By doing so, there is an incentive to play the game even in a state where it is confirmed that the section is not advantageous, such as after changing the setting, so that it is a motivation to start the game even when the store is opened. In addition, even if the lighting of the section lamp ends when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not determined that the state will be the most disadvantageous, so that the motivation for continuing the game even in such a case. It becomes. Further, up to this point, the effect section has been described as a gaming state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, but a disadvantageous aspect as compared with the increase section (for example, the frequency of notification is reduced or the target of notification is targeted). If it is (such as changing the role to be), it is possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the production section (normal game), first, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game by referring to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing of, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not shifting to the pseudo-bonus, and "winning (this time game)" means shifting from this game to the pseudo-bonus. "Winning (next game)" means shifting to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In the first gaming machine, if the "winning (current game)" is decided, the game is started at the start of the current game, and if the "winning (next game)" is decided, the game is played at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period of time and the reel effect ("red 7 aligned" effect) in which the "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 is performed during the invalid period. , If it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation in the game in which the pseudo bonus is started and the "Red 7 match" effect is performed, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) is effective. (It may be before that, but it is not the timing before the above-mentioned random delay processing is started), the information of the stop operation is notified.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later will be performed. (At the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) will not be held.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay"). In the game that wins "B"), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game (next time) after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the winning combination is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c), "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, rather than "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher. However, the mode in which "Tsu Lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu Lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, if "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. If so, it may not be possible to decide to move to a pseudo-bonus.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. Further, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and when the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) described later is not performed.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f), "passing lip 2" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, rather than "passing lip 1" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In the case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the mode in which "Tsu Lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu Lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Through Lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the mode relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, " When the "passing lip 1" is determined, it may not be possible to determine the transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (addition method or subtraction method may be used), and the ceiling game. When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that the "winning (current game)" is decided, or that the "winning (next game)" is always decided. Also, any of these can be determined by lottery.

In the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus due to the arrival of the number of ceiling games, a mode transition lottery (at the time of the ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus.

The processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow. Can be controlled using. In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of the sub flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. Can be controlled.

In addition, if "winning (this time game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section has already been determined at the timing when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined. Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transfer process at the time of reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. As described above, in the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus is started (“pseudo bonus start” in FIG. 5), it shifts to the increase section (pseudo bonus). .. Further, as described above, in the production section (normal game), when the game is controlled to the end A mode or the end B mode and the game of 32 games is digested without shifting to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "the end of the advantageous section". (Via End A / B) ”), shift to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (“end of advantageous section (limit processing)” in FIG. 5), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus is started. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus according to the current mode. In FIG. 8 (e), "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, regardless of the mode after the pseudo bonus ends. , Means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (shortened). The ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo-bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo-bonus.

If it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, and if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later when the pseudo bonus ends, the number of ceiling games according to the current mode Is set (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games may be temporarily set here). , The pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of ceiling games is reached, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "fixed role" or "middle che" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section). .. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that the transition destination mode may be determined even when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, the mode relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode is migrated. In order not to be determined as the destination mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game that wins "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, as in the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is a lottery value so that a mode relatively disadvantageous to the current mode is not determined as the transition destination mode. It may be referred to another mode transition lottery table with a different mode.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7D is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate the 1G consecutive lottery according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section or the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Will be done. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means that 1G series is not generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" has one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock). It means that it is given (1G continuous stock counter is added by 1). A plurality of (maximum 255) 1G continuous stocks can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be given in one pseudo bonus. It is also possible to configure the 1G consecutive lottery table so that a plurality of 1G consecutive stocks can be given by one 1G consecutive lottery.

If the value of the 1G series stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G series stock) at the end of the pseudo bonus, one 1G series stock is consumed (1G series stock counter is used). 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus according to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more at the end of the pseudo bonus (that is, if you do not have 1G consecutive stock), or if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games is provisional here. It may be set), the pseudo bonus ends (“pseudo bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game).

If you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. It may be executed, or the 1G continuous stock may be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store the information that can be carried forward that there is a ceiling shortening.

In the first gaming machine, as an example, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus) is that it continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 cards can be obtained, but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo-BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that can be continued for "22 games" and can acquire up to 110 cards, is installed. You may do so. In this case, when it is decided to transfer to the pseudo-bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transfer lottery, when reaching the ceiling, in the 1G continuous lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo-BB") is used. Whether to do it or to make it a "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). The value of the "pseudo RB" may be different from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). Therefore, for example, the number of continuous games is "pseudo". It is the same as "BB", but by setting the bell navigation rate (probability of notification that information on the stop operation is notified) to be low, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired and make the values different. Further, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel effect in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to that configured as a pseudo-bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuous games (game period) can be changed.

Further, if the execution condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section by limit processing"). ), As a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-card bet state. Therefore, when the game is played in a two-card bet state, for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. 8 and the like are not performed, and the lottery is not performed. The number of ceiling games is also not updated. Further, when the game is played in the two-card bet state during the pseudo-bonus, the medals are not increased in the two-card bet state, so that the pseudo-bonus is not an increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player is basically disadvantaged when playing a game in a two-card bet state.

Here, when the game is played in a two-card bet state, a lottery related to the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 and the like are used. Although various lottery) and processing (for example, updating the number of ceiling games, etc.) are not performed, the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter for the number of games limiter and the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter for the payout number limiter are updated. Should be done. Since these limiters have a function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired cards, these counters are not updated in the two-card bet state. If this is the case, the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired games may be exceeded due to the intervention of the game in the two-card bet state, and as a result, the gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. To get. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counter is configured to be updatable every game regardless of the number of bets.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the gaming is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, when the bonus state is reached during the pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase value of medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state 3-card bet state). , Pseudo-bonus may not be an increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be disadvantaged if he / she plays a game in a bonus state.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play the game in the state of three bets between the 2BB flags (in the present embodiment, the state of three bets between the two BB flags is the "recommended game". It may be described as a "state" and other states as a "deprecated gaming state"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 2-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags wins only in the 2-card bet state and wins in the 3-card bet state. It is not configured. Further, 3BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 3-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags wins only in the 3-card bet state and does not win in the 2-card bet state. Further, there is no case where 3BB wins between the 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB wins between the 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, 2BB is won in a two-card bet state between non-flags (without winning 2BB) to make a twoBB flag interval, and then a three-card bet state. If the game is played in, it is possible to play the game in the above-mentioned recommended game state without worrying about whether or not to win the bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortened lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, 1 The ceiling shortening lottery is won with a probability of / 8 (32/256), while the ceiling shortening lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than that, the "32 games" may be shortened. The number of ceiling games is not shortened.

Even in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games", the number of ceiling games has a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games". May be determined to be shortened.

Further, the mode of reducing the number of ceiling games is not limited to the above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a smaller number of predetermined games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be exhibited, so that the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won is further determined. Alternatively, in the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the opportunity for the ceiling shortening lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed for each game. You may do it. In these cases, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, 1G continuous lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (d), the 1G continuous stock may be given regardless of the current mode. That is, regardless of whether or not the mode is such that the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted.

The mode of granting the right is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G continuous lottery is prevented in consideration of the fact that the ceiling shortening lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games". It may be possible to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high by allowing the 1G continuous lottery to be performed at this time.

Further, the opportunity for the 1G continuous lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed in the advantageous section (directing section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the first gaming machine is in an advantageous state at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus when the current mode is the heaven mode. A special bonus medium effect to suggest that there is a certain probability is executed. Therefore, when the effect during the special bonus is executed, it can be expected that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. Further, the effect during this special bonus may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if the special bonus mid-effect is performed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that you are at least staying in heaven mode, and you expect that you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a probability of 100% even when the 1G continuous lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning It is possible to suggest various possibilities such as winning only, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) ends (for example). , In heaven mode), the period may be further shortened, so that even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when the limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by making it possible to play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

Further, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, in the case of the end mode). Since the advantageous state may be started again by granting (1G continuous stock), it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the "determined combination" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (that is, "F_determined cherry" or "F_". If "reach" is determined as an internal winning combination) and it is decided to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, there is a 1/2 probability (this probability is arbitrary). It is possible to execute a special lock effect. In addition, even when the sub-flag "middle check" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player also has the "fixed combination" as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Since you can receive the same benefits as when "" is determined, when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined, when the "fixed combination" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Similarly, a special lock effect may be made feasible.

Here, since the "fixed role" is a role that also confirms the pseudo bonus transition (see (c) in FIG. 7), the player shifts to the pseudo bonus and shifts to the heaven C mode when the special lock effect is executed. It has become possible to recognize that there was a problem, and it has become very interesting for players. The special lock effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect such that each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction may be performed, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. You may do it. Further, a special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce by combining these. Further, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effects are executed to the end or canceled halfway. It is also possible to leave it to the player to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described later, for example, even if the player stays in the heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. In some cases, it may not be desirable to perform the above-mentioned special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, if it is decided to execute the special lock effect first in a series of advantageous sections, the special lock effect is executed, but the same conditions are satisfied within the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. Even if it is established, it is controlled so that the special lock effect is not executed. As a method, once the special lock effect is executed, information indicating that fact is stored, and if the information is stored within the same series of advantageous sections after that, the special lock is originally performed. It may be possible not to make a decision as to whether or not to execute the effect, or the decision is made, but if the information is stored, it indicates that the decision result is executed. However, it may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

The mode in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of times that the execution of the special lock effect is restricted may be set as "2 times" or "3 times" instead of "1 time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set to a plurality of times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the ball output per special lock effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, and it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed on condition that the mode is the heaven C mode. However, for example, since the mode may shift to heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than the winning of the "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a special lock effect is also executed in these cases. It is assumed that a decision is made as to whether or not the game is played, and the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as or different from the case where the winning of the "determined role" is triggered). It may be decided that it will be done.

In addition, for example, it is assumed that whether or not the special lock effect is executed is first determined by the winning of the "fixed role", and when it is decided that the special lock effect is executed, heaven. You may shift to C mode. That is, the special lock effect may be executed according to the decision to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed according to the decision to execute the special lock effect. You may want to move to.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous section may be adopted as a condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control payout number counter described later is less than "1201". , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more after the determination of whether or not the special lock effect is executed is performed as described above, or the advantage described later. When the value of the section payout counter or the control payout counter becomes "1201" or more, it is not determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do it.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 16 described later). Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set a plurality of times, a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is set each time. Is controlled so that it is never done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is determined that the pachinko machine is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in a series of advantageous sections, triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, "determined combination"). , Control information with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that the special effect (for example, the special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine the secondary information (for example, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section) according to the determined internal winning combination, and the secondary information according to the combination of the displayed symbols (for example). For example, it is possible to determine (sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section), and whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information on the player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information. It is possible to decide.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of the advantageous state, so that the advantageous state can be obtained. It is possible to diversify the playability related to granting.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, so that it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), the first special combination (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special combination (for example, 3 cards) can be won. , 2BB) is not possible to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right rip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), and the first 2 It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel rip") in the special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) (see FIG. 15 described later).

Then, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine different secondary information depending on whether the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or the combination of specific symbols is displayed. That is, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is set, which is advantageous. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of states.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to the re-game, it is said that the re-game is activated regardless of which one is displayed. The same benefits will be granted.

The mode of granting the same privilege is not limited to the above. For example, a specific role is configured as a specific small role related to the granting of game value. Then, when winning a specific small winning combination, for example, in the first special permission state, one card (this value is arbitrary and may be another value equal to or less than the bet game value, or bet. The combination of predetermined symbols to which the game value of (which may exceed the value of the game value) (the combination of the symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "right-up lip") is displayed, and the second special permission is given. If it is in a state, a combination of specific symbols to which the same number of game values as when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed (a combination of symbols related to the addition of game value corresponding to "parallel rip") is displayed. You may.

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are "off" symbol combinations (although it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, so the symbols are different from the pure "off" cases. It may be configured as a combination of identifiable symbols). Even in this case, the values are the same.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set. It is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of an advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player has a direct disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode in the case of the second special permission state, and it is possible to display a specific combination. It may be configured so that it is not possible to display a combination of specific symbols when the stop operation is not performed in the embodiment.

Then, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to make the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state different between when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and when the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in the case of the first special permission state, and the stop operation is performed in the specific mode in the second special permission state. Is performed, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a predetermined combination of symbols may be displayed.

In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in the present embodiment, this may be described as "pressing position ○", "pressing position correct answer", etc.). When the combination of specific symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressing position ×", "incorrect answer of pressing position", etc.), the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the stop operation (timing) of the player, so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

Further, as described above, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination, and in this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (when the pressing position is ○), the specific symbol is used. The combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are given, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position ×), the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to (timing) the player's stop operation, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations at different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the first specific combination is not displayed and the timing of the stop operation is the second timing different from the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation. And when the timing is other than the second timing, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed without proper stop operation, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Further, in this case, the specific combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of the incorrect answer pressing order), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. When the value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect batting order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values can be given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to the stop operation (procedure) of the player, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when the left first stop is performed, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the middle / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. When it is the first specific combination and the middle first stop, the combination of the specific symbol is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is the left / right first stop, the specific symbol is not an appropriate stop operation. The combination is not displayed. When the second specific combination is not displayed and the right first stop is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / middle first stop is performed, the appropriate stop operation is not performed. A third specific combination is provided in which the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Up to this point, in the unit game that wins the specific combination, the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing and batting order of the stop operation) and the advantageous section. Although it was stated that the judgment process regarding the granting of the advantageous state in (including the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) is changed. Of these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may result in disadvantage) can be regarded as the above-mentioned penalties. Therefore, when such a change occurs, an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention may be generated.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, it is more likely that an advantageous state will be given when the combination of specific symbols is displayed than when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It has become. That is, on the premise of betting three cards, the second special permission state (for example, between the 2BB flags) is given preferential treatment over the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags). Is.

Further, in the first game machine, when a predetermined combination (for example, "pushing order bell B" described later) is won, a combination of assigned symbols (for example, eight payouts) can be given regardless of the batting order in the first special permission state. The combination of symbols that becomes If the correct answer is not in the correct batting order, the combination of the given symbols will not be displayed, and the game value will not be given. It is configured to display a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols to be paid out). That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment over the second special permission state.

That is, if the player plays a game in a three-card bet state between the 3BB flags even in a deprecated gaming state, the probability of granting an advantageous state is not given preferential treatment, but the game value when the advantageous state is not operating. Since the grant probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively small. As described above, although the possibility that the player can rapidly increase the game value is reduced, the state in which the player's game value is difficult to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player plays a game in the recommended gaming state, the probability of granting the advantageous state is given preferential treatment, but the probability of granting the game value when the advantageous state is not operating is not given preferential treatment, so that the advantageous state operates. The game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when it is operating and when it is not operating is relatively large. As described above, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "rough wave state".

Here, the method for creating two states, a stable state and a rough wave state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is higher than in the "rough wave state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is higher than in the "rough wave state". Lower. Further, in the "rough wave state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is lower than in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is lower than in the "stable state". Increase. By doing this, in the "stable state", it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is difficult to make a series of villas. Can be created. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined combination may be changed between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. Design layout configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "red blank", " Ten kinds of symbols of "white blank 1" and "white blank 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. 11 to 14 are views showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the first gaming machine, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like. That is, in the following, any symbol is used according to the type of the internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine and the stop operation mode (that is, batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (Display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) will be described.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 wins with the probability (lottery value / probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. It should be noted that the combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to the small combination. Is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a two-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a three-card bet state. It is configured so that if it is broken, it will not be decided as an internal winning role. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB). Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 2BB flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a 3-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a 2-card bet state. It is configured so that if it is broken, it will not be decided as an internal winning role. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in a three-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB). Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" may not be displayed in the two-card bet state.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the column of "bonus state" is referred to in FIG. 10, and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of possible game starts is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state in which the RB, which is the first-class special accessory, is operating (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two prizes are generated or two games are played after the operation, the operation is once terminated and the operation is performed again. Further, in the first gaming machine, the end condition of the 2BB state is defined as that more than one medal has been paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition of the 3BB state is the end condition of more than 176 medals in the 3BB state. Is stipulated to have been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, the special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode is changed to the bonus state (the mode is not changed during the bonus state, which is synonymous with the end of the bonus state), that is, if the current mode is the "start mode", the transition destination The mode of is "start mode". If the current mode is any of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the destination mode is "normal A mode". If the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". If the current mode is any of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the transition destination mode is "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between the non-flags and between the 2BB flags, either "REP64" to "REP72" (these are the "replay" symbols in the lower straight line or the middle straight line. Since they are to be displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel rip". Further, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower rip", and "REP72" is "middle rip". (Can be called "rip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, "REP73" (this can be referred to as "right-up rip" because the "replay" symbol is displayed upward to the right) regardless of the stop operation mode. It is displayed and a replay is given.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is given.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing position is at least the left reel 3L, any one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" (these are to display the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L at the bottom. Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, other rips (for example, “REP57” to “REP59”) are displayed, and a replay is given.

The "F_confirmed cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pushing position is at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are). On the left reel 3L, the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower row, and for example, a symbol such as "REP42" that can raise the expectations of the player on other reels is also displayed. "Confirmed cherry lip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, other rips (for example, the above-mentioned “cherry rip” and “REP29” to “REP41”) are displayed, and a re-game is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least if the pushing position is ○ for the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are). Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row on the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle row cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, other rips (for example, “REP20” to “REP27”) are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

The "F_reach eye" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP01" to "REP14" regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customarily a player). It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) the transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip"), and the replay is displayed. Granted. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_watermelon" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, any of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (since these are for displaying "watermelon" symbols side by side, these are displayed. "Watermelon") is displayed, and if a 3-card bet state, 3 medals are paid out, and if a 2-card bet state, 2 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, either “FRU08” or “FRU09” (these are not displayed side by side with the “watermelon” symbols, so these can be collectively referred to as “watermelon spills”). Is displayed and one medal is paid out. It should be noted that, in the case of the pressed position ×, it is also possible to generate a dropout so that the number of medals paid out is 0.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_ "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "pushing order bell A" is a 6-choice push order small role (one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If the internal winning combination is determined and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "right-down bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "Middle bell" ("FRU04"), "Right-up bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower bell" ("FRU07"). Is displayed, 8 medals are paid out if the bet is 3 cards, and 2 medals are paid out if the bet is 2 cards. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 in the remaining stopping operations, and the pressing position is ○. If there is, any of the winning "one-card combination" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_ The "bell 312B1", "F_bell 312B2", "F_bell 321B1", and "F_bell 321B2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" does not have a push order small combination between the 3BB flags in the two-card bet state and the three-card bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, 8 medals will be paid out if the 3-card bet state, and 2 if the 2-card bet state. One medal is paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the "pushing order bell B" is pushed in a state other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between the non-flags in the 3-bet state and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). It is a small winning combination, and if it is decided as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct answer pressing order, one of the above "bells" will be displayed and 8 medals will be displayed. It will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 in the remaining stopping operations, and the pressing position is ○. If there is, one of the winning "one-card combination" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"8 F_RB combinations" are configured to be determinable as internal winning combinations in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight medals are paid out.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "one-card combination" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one card is displayed. Medal is paid out.

The correspondence between the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 15, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. is only an example and is shown in these. The mode is not limited to the above.

For example, in the first gaming machine, "BB02" can be displayed when "BB01" is dropped and becomes "missing" in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when it is pure "off". In the 3-bet state, when "BB02" is missed and becomes "missing", when it becomes "missing" due to being in the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, it is in the 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. As a result, "off" may occur in various states, such as when "off" occurs, when "pushing order small winning combination" is missed and "out" occurs. Therefore, in order to make the combination of symbols displayed as "missing" different in some or all of these cases, the combination of these different symbols is specified in advance in the symbol combination table, and the internal winning combination is determined. By allowing the display as a "corresponding symbol combination" according to the situation, it is possible to make the combination of the symbols related to the "missing" displayed according to the state or the like different.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), and quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) Each limit processing of the number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and it is possible to execute limit processing other than each of these limit processing, and some of these limit processing are executed. You can also prevent it from being done.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1500 times). The advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section game number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. To migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the game period of the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games, and the presence / absence of ceiling shortening). Information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary for controlling the advantageous section) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the payout number counter in the advantageous section becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the production section) is started, and is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when "missing" or "missing" occurs during the advantageous section. The value to be subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase and decreases after the start of the advantageous section, it may become a negative value (or if it becomes a negative value, "0" is always maintained. Can also be configured to be). That is, the advantageous section payout number counter can count from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the defined highest point (difference number: 2400).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. To migrate to. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1445 times). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control game number counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the pseudo bonus. When is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transition to the non-advantageous section is performed. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter where the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in the first game machine, the maximum number of games (sustainable period) in the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (Fig.). 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is lowered. In some cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (number of games) is performed in the game before the continuous period (55 games) per increase section, compared to the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. By executing this, it is prevented that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle and the player feels distrust or loss.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game before the continuous period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) for each increase section 2 times before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. It may be done. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game of. Further, for example, in the case of a specification such as passing through a precursor state before shifting to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game that is continuous (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) before the game to be played. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). The control payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, which is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control payout counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

Further, in the control payout number counter, when a "missing" occurs during the advantageous section, a value to be appropriately counted is subtracted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3"). However, the control payout counter does not cause "missing" (or difference) when "missing" occurs during the advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out). As a result, the number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game in which a "push order bell A" is won with a 3-card bet, if the hitting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference is "8"). On the other hand, if the hitting order is not appropriate, the number of medals to be paid out will be "1" (the difference is "-2") if the pressing position is appropriate, and if the pressing position is not appropriate. The number of medals to be paid out will be "0" (the difference is "-3") due to the omission, but the control payout counter will be the difference in the number of medals in any case. +5 sheets "is counted.

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to the operation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is advantageous. It is corrected to the value of the section payout counter. The control payout counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout counter.

When the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), if it is in the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is in the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. When is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transition to the non-advantageous section is performed. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section payout number counter where the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates) is "2401", the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in the first game machine, the maximum number of acquired cards (the amount of game value that can be granted) in the pseudo bonus is "275". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be granted during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the game value corresponding to the predetermined regulated game value amount is given in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed immediately after or during the start of the pseudo bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is reduced. It may end up. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a game value amount that is smaller than the game value amount that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) is given to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). Occasionally, by executing a special limit process (number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is smaller than the game value amount that can be granted per two increase sections (275 sheets x 2 sets = 550 sheets) is given, compared to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) + the grace period is equivalent to the amount of game value for which normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount smaller than the game value amount (8 sheets) to be played is given. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

In the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the value of the 1G continuous counter (when the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is obtained, "1" is further added to the value of the control game number counter. ) Is multiplied by "55" (that is, the duration of the pseudo-bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1390" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , The quasi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (operated).

For the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout counter value (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "ceiling shortening is available". ) Is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given a pseudo bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1851" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout counter is "1301". , The quasi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (operated). Since the quasi-limit processing (number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) both regulate the same contents, after one operating condition is satisfied and the other operating condition is activated, the other operating condition is applied. Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate in duplicate.

When the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the preparation limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. Will not be done. That is, the extension of the game period in the increased section is suppressed. The method of suppressing the extension of the gaming period in the increasing section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of the 1G consecutive lottery may be lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be lower than usual. .. That is, although the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery itself are executed, it may be difficult to win these lottery. Further, for example, in the effect section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that is the winning in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value at which the mode transition advantageous to the player is determined in the mode transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonus to be consecutively villaged.

Further, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, a "fixed combination" ((FIG. 7) Special processing is performed at the time of winning a)). Hereinafter, this special process will be described by taking as an example a case where the “determined combination” is “F_determined cherry” (hereinafter, may be simply described as “determined cherry”).

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, if the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition lottery is drawn. In, the "winning (next game)" is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). Further, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol with high expectations for the player, so in a game in which the stop operation information is not notified, the player is on the left. The general procedure is to stop at one stop and aim at the "cherry" symbol (aiming at the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when the game is played by a general procedure, when the "determined cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the left first stop. If neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating and the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2"). ") May be notified to the effect that it should be done. Further, the "winning (next game)" is not limited to the one in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game, and may be the one in which the pseudo bonus is started from the game after the next game.

Here, the skilled player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol even in the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further determine whether the player is a "weak che" or a "confirmed cherry". Perform the operation. As a result, it can be recognized that the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel and the "confirmed cherry" is won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, the player without skill does not perform or cannot perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, so that the stop display mode is "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "confirmed cherry" (for example, see "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and the "confirmed cherry lip". When the combination of the symbols of is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, in the case of winning the "confirmed cherry", the combination of the "confirmed cherry lip" symbols was not displayed, but the special winning sound was also displayed when the combination of the "cherry lip" symbols was displayed. It is designed to be output. The output of the special winning sound may be performed with a probability of 100% or may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, and if you win the "confirmed cherry", "Red 7 will be aligned" at the start of the next game. It is notified that the production is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

On the other hand, if either the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated and then the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (which may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition is made. Although the "winning (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "winning (current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the "red 7 matching" effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "middle stage lip" without displaying the combination of the symbols of the "determined cherry lip" (including the combination of the symbols of the "cherry lip") is performed. Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop (“batting order 5” and “batting order 6”) should be performed (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the flow of the game is that "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed → the pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game is called "middle rip" display by performing the pseudo bonus start → stop operation according to the special notification from this game. It is changed to the flow of. It should be noted that the special notification may be performed by the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and as a result, the player does not suffer any disadvantage regardless of the shift to the pseudo bonus. It may be performed by the control only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

It should be noted that, after either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and even though the special notification is performed, the "confirmed" is performed. When the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols is displayed, the special winning sound is not output.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure of the stop operation is not notified. Therefore, assuming that the procedure of the stop operation is notified and the "middle stage lip" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of them is performed. There is a possibility that the player will be clearly aware that the quasi-limit process has been activated, and as a result, the interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any of the quasi-limit processes is activated (or even after the operation of any of the quasi-limit processes), "F_replay A" or When "F_replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be performed with a predetermined probability. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification being performed. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification is performed even when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the "winning (this time game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Up to this point, in order to operate the normal limit processing, the special limit processing, and the quasi-limit processing, the game period of the advantageous section is monitored by using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts" as an example. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter, assuming that each limit process is executed. And whether or not the ceiling is shortened (that is, a variable for operating the quasi-limit processing) and the like can be appropriately changed according to the game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the gaming period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, if the "navigation count" is used to monitor the game period of an advantageous section, the normal limit processing (navigation count), the special limit processing (navigation count), or the quasi-limit processing (navigation count) is performed in the same manner as above. The number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be adopted in order to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, and the value for which the normal limit processing is normally executed for the adopted element. By defining the value at which the special limit processing is executed and the value at which the quasi-limit processing is executed, it is possible to assume that each limit processing is executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example). , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). ), This series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445"". When the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is "2126" or more). In the case of an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by the natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, advantageous). When the value of the section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). When, or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is "2126" or more), the advantageous state. If not, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by the natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted while giving consideration to the emotions of the player.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the gaming period in a series of advantageous sections is a specific period. When the special period is shorter than that and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit processing (number of games) is executed). Or, when the amount of game value given in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is a quasi-limit). When the processing (number of payouts) reaches a value to be executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent advantageous section. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing the excessive increase in gambling.

Further, in the first gaming machine, in counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount", for example, it should be originally given due to an operation error of the player, ignoring of instructions, and the like. Even if there is a difference between the amount of game value that was actually given and the amount of game value that was actually given, the count is based on the amount of game value that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference. It is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being lost, it is possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the winning combination (for example, "determined cherry") is determined to shift to the advantageous state in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed (for example, the state after the quasi-limit processing operation). At that time, a special notification is performed so as not to display a combination of special symbols (for example, "determined cherry lip") in which the winning of the definite combination can be clearly recognized. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even when such a special notification is performed. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the combination of special symbols is displayed in the winning combination in a state where the grant of the right is not suppressed, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, it is not possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed role in a state where the grant of rights is suppressed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, whether or not to perform special notification is determined according to whether or not the winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not special notification has been performed. I try to decide. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter count regardless of the amount of game value bet, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state. It is possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts).

Further, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter count in the three-card bet state, but do not count in the two-card bet state. Therefore, it is possible to execute special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) in the 3-card bet state, but special limit processing (number of games) and special limit in the 2-card bet state. It is not possible for the process (number of payouts) to be executed. Therefore, in the two-card bet state, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during the pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit processing (number of games) or the normal limit processing (number of payouts).

In the first gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of a small winning combination and the number of medals paid out differ between the 3-card bet state and the 2-card bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15), and the 3-card bet state. It is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game in the state of two bets than to play the game in. However, in this way, the method that is more disadvantageous to the player when playing the game in the state of two bets is not limited to this. For example, when the game is played in the state of two bets during the pseudo bonus, the player may be configured to be disadvantageous by not notifying the procedure of the stop operation.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, "3 cards") is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections is forced in the middle of the advantageous state. It is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state without being terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be. On the other hand, when a second amount (for example, "2 cards") of the game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player aware that the game was not performed by the intended game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such an alert, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and the player should play the game in a game method not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carry-over combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configuration of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data structure.

Each of the above-mentioned storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26 represented by 1 byte of data. The data stored in each storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 17, but in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, a symbol combination associated with the bits of each storage area is used. The "combination" (in FIG. 17, described in the order of the design of the reel 3L, the design of the reel 3C, and the design of the reel 3R) and the contents thereof (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in this game). It is used to. For example, when 2BB is won in this game (when it is carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning operation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the display combination (that is, the type of symbol combination displayed on the valid line in this game). Used to do. For example, when the combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the valid line in this game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area makes it possible for the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on the valid line in this game while the main CPU 101 is rotating at least one of the reels. Used for. For example, when at least one of the reels is rotating in this game, if the combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the effective line, "1" is set to bit 0 of the storage area 1. Is stored.

(Carryover storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The carry-over combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when the bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as the internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. In addition, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination (bonus combination) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning combination (small combination / replay combination) determined by the internal lottery process. Will be done.

(Game status flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Since the first gaming machine is not provided with the RT state, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state, but for example, an RT state is provided. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of the gaming state (mode) in the advantageous section is separately stored in the mode flag storage area described later, but the data is stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. You can also do it. The same applies to the non-advantageous section and the game section of the advantageous section. An advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming state such as the AT state and the ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The mode flag storage area is composed of a storage area 1 and a storage area 2 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively. For example, when the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1. Further, for example, when the current mode is the heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 2. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Activity stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 in the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 of the stop button that has not yet been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, when the stop button 8L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The press order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons are pressed, that is, the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing order storage area. Then, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. Will be stored. Then, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but bit 1 remains stored. "0" will be stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order of the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described. In the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are limited to this. It's not a thing.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing procedure. Further, FIG. 23 also shows the power-on processing executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (S1). In this process, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as a winning flag storage area and a winning operation flag storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, and the like are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, an internal lottery random value (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and a production random value used in various lottery related to playability (other lottery random values) (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 0 to (Range of 255) and the like are extracted, and the extracted various random value values are stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The acquisition mode of various random numbers is not limited to the above. A required number of random values can be appropriately obtained from each predetermined numerical range (for example, a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, a range of 0 to 127, etc.). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining the internal winning combination are performed based on the internal lottery table according to the current game state and the random value for the internal lottery. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, for various game states, when the game is started, if the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is transferred according to the established transition condition. Or, perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S7). In this process, the data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32) described later. The data generation, storage, and transmission methods for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the main side effect control process at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game is started, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the start of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, for example, when the stop operation information is notified by the instruction monitor in the AT state, the notification mode is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control such as the type of the stop table used in the current game and the type of the attraction priority table is set based on the internal winning combination, the game state, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S10). This process requires the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) described later, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled. The rotation starts. Each reel that has started rotation is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a reel rotation start command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel (in this case, all reels), the attraction priority is set by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set attraction priority table. The indicated data is acquired and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process described later is performed prior to this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. Perform various processing necessary for this. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is a combination of any of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a winning operation command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout / replay operation process (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if it is a combination of symbols related to a replay combination, the next time. Performs various processes necessary for operating the re-game in the game. For example, when the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, the same number of values as the number of bets in this game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter described later. Perform the processing. Further, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a state control process at the end of the game (S15). In this process, for various gaming states, when the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols) when the game is completed, the gaming state is shifted according to the established transition condition. , Or perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the state control process at the end of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the main side effect control process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the end of the game, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the end of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that processes other than these processes are appropriately performed as needed, or it is possible to configure it so that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the above-mentioned various processes are merely examples.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on processing performed in S1 of the above-mentioned main processing will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 after performing an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (not shown), and determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 is normally performed as a result of the test (as a result of the test). S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (YES in S21), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S22), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the time of changing the setting (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased when the settings of the carry-over combination storage area, the game state flag storage area, the mode flag storage area, and the like are changed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation / storage process (S24). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation, after the main RAM 103 is initialized, a new setting value is set (stored) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Will be done. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (S26). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the setting value is newly set.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the off state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (YES in S26), the initialization command generation / storage process is performed (S27). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on processing.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the ON state (NO in S22), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off (at the time of the power cutoff) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S29). In this process, the pachi-slot machine 1 is restored to the state before the power failure. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on processing.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that the writing to the main RAM 103 was not normally performed (S21 is NO), and in S28, when it is determined that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), an error at power-on is performed. Processing is performed (S30). It should be noted that the error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the above-mentioned reset operation, but is resolved according to the newly set value. Therefore, the main CPU 101 is normal until the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off once after the error processing at the time of power-on, and then until a new set value is set (until the above-mentioned processes S22 to S26 are performed). It does not shift to the process (after S2 in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception / start check processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for medal acceptance / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay combination has been won (whether the replay has been activated) in the previous unit game.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (S41 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the processing of S42, the medal auxiliary storage switch check processing is performed (S43). In this process, it is determined whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is in the ON state (that is, whether a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is used. If it is determined that it is in the ON state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the process waits until the error is resolved. If it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this process is terminated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits is checked, and it is also determined whether medals are prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the medals will be accepted. Make it possible to accept (accept bet operations) (allow medal acceptance). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be accepted (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that the medal can be accepted (YES in S45), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection result of the medal sensor 31S and the detection result of the bet switch 6S. Further, although details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that medals cannot be inserted or credits can be inserted (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is "50") (S49 is NO). , The acceptance of medals is prohibited (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 is in a state in which medals cannot be accepted (a state in which betting operations cannot be accepted).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the medal cannot be accepted (S45 is NO), in S47 it determines that the medal can be inserted or credited (S47 is YES), and After the processing of S48, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted cards is the number of cards that can start the game (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (YES in S49), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start operation has been performed by the player.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), the main CPU 101 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (S49 is NO), and in S50, when it is determined that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S50 is NO), processing is performed. Is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S61). In this process, the set value and the number of bets in this unit game are checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to a set value, a number of bets, a game state, and the like (S62). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 acquires an internal lottery random number value from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for internal lottery acquired in S4 of the above-mentioned main process. In this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", a serious error has occurred in the main CPU 101. Then, the above-mentioned power-on error processing (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired random number value for internal lottery is sequentially updated (for example, addition update) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination specified in the set internal lottery table, and the update result becomes a predetermined result. It is determined whether or not it has overflowed (for example, whether it has overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of this unit game. If the predetermined result is not obtained even if all the internal winning combinations are determined, the result of this unit game is "missing" ("missing" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combination to be determined (the random number value for internal lottery is also sequentially updated), and until the determination is made for all the internal winning combination (or the internal winning combination is in the middle of the determination). The process of S64 is repeated (until it is determined).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (YES in S65), is the determined internal winning combination a non-carry-over non-target role (that is, a small role or a replay instead of a bonus role that is a carry-over role)? Whether or not it is a role) is determined (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carry-over non-target combination (YES in S66), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the processing of S64. That is, in the winning flag storage area, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over non-target combination (S66 is NO), and after the processing of S67, is the determined internal winning combination a carry-over target combination? That is, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus role that is a carry-over role (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carry-over target combination (YES in S68), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any of the bonus combinations has been carried over yet. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S69), the main CPU 101 updates the carry-over combination storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carry-over combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

In S68, the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over target combination (S68 is NO), and in S69, determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO). ), And after the processing of S70, it is determined again whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (NO in S71), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when the bonus combination is carried over (or won in the unit game this time), the main CPU 101 has data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. Stores "1" in the bit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing in S72, the main CPU 101 performs sub-flag and the like setting processing (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. In this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set. Then, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process after this process.

(State control process at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the start of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S81). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting between the flags as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus combination, it is checked whether or not the predetermined bonus combination has been won in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, the flag is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a gaming state stored in the gaming state flag storage area), so that the check here is unnecessary. Further, for example, when there is a specific RT state that starts or ends by playing a specific number of games from the establishment of a specific transition condition, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S82), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S84). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In some cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is not satisfied (S82 is NO), and after the processing of S84, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S85), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (start condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not the lottery result is to start the advantageous section.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). When it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S87 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S87), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) an advantageous section. In this process, for example, counting of various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes is started (that is, monitoring of a game period of a series of advantageous sections is started) in response to the start of the advantageous section. Perform the setting process of.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, according to the set transition destination mode, when shifting to the pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the gaming period, and the game shifts to the end mode. In that case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and when shifting to other modes, the number of ceiling games corresponding to each is set. Further, a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery (see FIGS. 7 and 8 and the like) is set. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game start processing during the advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S92). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processings are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S93). When it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode in the advantageous section (game state), and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode, depending on the end of the advantageous section. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 28, the game start time processing during the advantageous section performed in the above-mentioned game start time state control process S91 will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtraction (addition) by 1 for each game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S102). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S102), the main CPU 101 performs an AT period management process (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the start of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. (If it is possible to shorten the game period in the AT state, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process of S101, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag, the 1G continuous lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. Processing is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command, and the like are set. In this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. That is, when the notification target combination wins in the AT state, navigation may not always occur, and whether or not navigation is generated in this process is a predetermined condition (for example, the type of notification target combination or a predetermined navigation). It may be determined according to the probability of occurrence).

In S102, the main CPU 101 determines in S102 whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the mode is not in the specific mode (S102 is NO) and after S104 (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing of S90 is performed in this processing. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when it is determined that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S105 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start processing during the advantageous section.

The game start state control process shown in FIG. 27, the game end state control process shown in FIG. 30, the game start process during the advantageous section shown in FIG. 28, and the game end process during the advantageous section shown in FIG. 31 are performed. The processing configuration is basically the same. This is a process that may be performed at either the start of the game or the end of the game (for example, the process of referring to the determined internal winning combination such as the game state or the transition of the mode). Regarding the processing that the processing result should be reflected until the end of this game (or until the next game starts), it means that either one should be performed, and both are the same. It does not mean that the processing of is performed in duplicate. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished.

On the other hand, for those that need to be processed when the game is started (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting process, etc.), it is assumed that the processing is performed when the game is started, and when the game is finished. For those that need to be processed (for example, processing that refers to a combination of displayed symbols), it may be performed when the game is completed. Further, for example, a process that needs to be processed at a predetermined time after the start of the game and before the end of the game, or a process that should be processed (for example, a process that refers to a stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) May be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). When the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until all the reels rotate at a constant speed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), the stop of each reel is permitted (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Further, the operation stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). When the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the valid stop button is operated. When performing automatic stop control, it is possible to measure this standby time and configure the automatic stop control to be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bit in the operation stop button storage area is used. "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, the bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the control target reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S117). In this process, for example, the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (movement amount of the symbol) is determined by referring to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table, the data of the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the scheduled stop position from the stop start position and the number of slip pieces (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the symbol position data of the position where the symbol finally stops from the number of slip pieces determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the scheduled stop positions. ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S119). In this process, the data of the reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel stop command can be configured to include not only the scheduled stop position but also a parameter that can specify the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code storage process (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are reels that are still rotating (whether or not the stop operation is performed for all the reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), the main CPU 101 performs a control change process (S122). In this process, for example, when it is necessary to change the stop table, the pull-in priority table, etc. set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process according to the stop operation mode of the player up to this point, such a process is performed. Reset various information required for stop control.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel, the set internal winning combination is set while referring to the type of the symbol at the scheduled stop position in the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the pull-in priority is acquired by referring to the pull-in priority table and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(State control process at the end of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 30, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, it is checked whether or not the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed in this process. Further, in the case of a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether or not the combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by paying out the medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S132), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area, and 2BB. Set the state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, when the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied, bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In some cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, "1" is set in the payout number as the end condition, and the 3BB state is set. If the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "176".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing of S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S135), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S136). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S86 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). When it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S138). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S88 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started advantageous section. As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. As described above, since only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, this processing is the same as the processing of S90 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S135 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game end processing during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processings are satisfied based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S143). When the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S143), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode in the advantageous section (game state), and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode, depending on the end of the advantageous section. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S143), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 31, the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the above-mentioned state control processing at the end of the game will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S152). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S152), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the end of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. (If it is possible to shorten the game period in the AT state, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process of S151, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the mode is not in the specific mode (S152 is NO) and after S153 (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S154), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing of S140 is performed in this processing. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when it is determined that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S154 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end processing during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, a periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (1 interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the cycle of periodic interrupt processing is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this, or even if the same cycle is set, the interrupt process is actually performed for a part or all of the process. By setting the number of interrupts to "2" or more, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this as a result.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input state (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) is checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt, and it is checked whether or not there is a change in the input state. If there is a change in the input state, the input of the main RAM 103 is performed. The change is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state not related to the change is directly stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled, and the rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. In this process, when the command data is not stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in the input port storage area 0 and the input port storage area 1 is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In the present embodiment, various command data are temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the periodic interruption process. For example, various command data are stored in the communication data storage area. Instead of storing the data, the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in the present embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication. For example, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication. It may be configured to be transmitted to.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state and the like checked in S202 described above. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S208). In this process, for example, the lower door mechanism DD open / close state is checked based on the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56. When various error states have occurred and the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S209). Then, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process after this process.

[7. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 33, an outline of the sub-side control process executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of an outline of the sub-side control process.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, various restrictions are provided on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but the sub-control circuit The 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case) is not so restricted. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) varies depending on the type and number of connected effect devices, the type of effect performed by the effect device, and the manufacturing cost. It is possible to use the configuration. That is why the term "outline" is used in FIG. 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs the power-on processing (S301 and S302) in the same manner as the main CPU 101. In this process, various tasks necessary for detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializing the data stored in the sub RAM 203, and performing various effect execution control processes described later. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect execution control process at the time of command reception (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referred to, and if the settings have been changed, the initialization process is appropriately executed on the sub side as well, and the settings must not be changed. If so, the process of returning to the state before the power failure is executed on the sub side as well.

In addition, for example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if it is in a non-AT state, the content of the effect of suggesting or notifying the internal winning combination, the game state, etc. (as necessary). It is decided (by lottery), and various production devices are controlled so that the production of the determined content is executed. Further, in the AT state, in addition to this, the content of the effect of notifying the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

Further, for example, when a lock command is received, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined by referring to the information of the parameter of the received lock command, and various effects are executed so that the effect of the determined content is executed. Control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to, and it is linked with the stop start position and the scheduled stop position (or simply what number stop operation was performed, etc.). The content of the effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed. In addition, for example, when a winning operation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning operation command is referred to, and when a privilege is given, the content of the effect linked to the given privilege is determined and determined. Control various production devices so that the production of is executed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub control board 72 (including the one connected via the sub relay board 74), for example, when the effect buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the effect is executed when the effect button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when the effect button according to the effect is operated during the execution of the operation-linked effect, various effect devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Further, for example, when the effect button is operated for calling the user menu described later during non-game, control for displaying the user menu is performed. Further, when the effect button is operated for the selection / decision operation while the user menu is displayed, the control according to these operations is performed.

Further, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, when the non-operation period in which the operation related to the game and the operation related to the user menu are not performed becomes a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demo status notification is determined and determined. Various production devices are controlled so that the production of the desired content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with various functions for controlling the game, various functions for controlling the effect, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have a function. In the following, an example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the game store side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's production operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and a selection / determination operation is appropriately performed for the selected menu, the player obtains various information. , It is possible to make various settings.

For example, when the "arrangement / payout table" is selected / determined, game information indicating the symbol arrangement in the pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the payout (contents of the privilege) at the time of winning can be confirmed. The information screen is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "volume / light amount adjustment" is selected / determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachi-slot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light amount of the lamp / LED group, and the like are set. The possible setting screen is displayed in the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that accepts the operation related to.

Further, for example, when "custom" is selected / determined, the effect mode in the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the type of the character used for the effect (the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character). (Including the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of occurrence of the effect (including the type of expectation when the effect occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (effect execution timing). Etc.)) etc.) can be set. The setting screen is displayed in the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that accepts the operation related to.

Further, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected and determined, it is possible to receive an information providing service using a player's mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.). In such an information providing service, for example, a player logs in to start a game (may be a case where the game is started without a login operation), and a logout operation is performed at the end of the game to perform game history information (for example,). , Information according to the results of various games, such as how many games have been played in total, how many times an advantageous game state has occurred, and how many cards have been acquired at the maximum) can be confirmed or acquired.

Further, for example, the game history information includes information indicating the type of character that can be displayed during the game and the type of music that can be output, depending on the result of the game (establishment of the opening condition), and the player's information. It also includes information about incidental benefits such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of music that can be output.

In addition, various methods can be adopted as the login / logout method in such an information providing service. For example, using the player's terminal, the player may be made to read the two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display unit to log in / log out, or the player may be entered with a password. (Specifically, at the time of logout at the end of the game, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input instead of the two-dimensional code, and the password is stored. The player can take notes on paper media, take pictures with a mobile terminal, etc., and log in by logging in by logging in before the next game starts (the password obtained in this way can be entered). -Logout may be performed. In addition, these methods can be combined as appropriate so that login / logout can be performed.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, the hall menu is displayed by the setting confirmation operation of the administrator on the game store side (may be the setting change operation or other operation by the administrator on the game store side), and the desired menu is selected in the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected / determined, the manager of the game store can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the date and time of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed in the effect display unit. The date and time may be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the above-mentioned sub-side power-on processing (see S302 in FIG. 33).

Further, for example, when "total medal information" is selected / determined, historical information indicating the number of inserted and paid out numbers within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

Further, for example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected / determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 etc. An information screen is displayed on the effect display unit so that the history information indicating the above can be confirmed. Further, for example, when "error information history" is selected / determined, history information indicating the error occurrence date / time and its contents within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is shown. An information screen that enables confirmation is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "monitoring history" is selected / determined, history information indicating the door opening date / time and the period within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. Further, for example, when the "warning setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the mode and frequency of various warning notifications in the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when the "power saving mode setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu. In addition, at the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that accepts the operation related to.

Further, for example, when the "stop setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the stop function in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The stop function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, makes the game inoperable until the manager of the game store performs a release operation (for example, a reset operation). Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantage). It may be established when any of the sections (including the effect section) is completed. Further, when the stop function is set to the on state, the automatic settlement function described later may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when the "automatic settlement setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (that is, all credited game values are automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantage). It may be established when any of the sections (including the effect section) is completed. Further, when the automatic settlement function is set to the on state, the above-mentioned stop function may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the stop function or automatic settlement function, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept the operation related to the setting more easily. Can be used as a part of an operation unit that accepts an operation related to the setting (that is, an operation unit that accepts an effect operation). However, in this case, it is not desirable to increase the number of operation units that can be unnecessarily accepted. Therefore, only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as a part of the operation unit that accepts the operation related to the setting. May be possible.

[9. Expansion example]
Up to this point, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited thereto. For example, it can be applied to a game machine called a so-called "pachinko machine", a "slot machine", or the like, and the same effect can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines capable of playing a game (performing a game control) according to a player's game operation (operation). Further, the configuration and functions of the gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and expansions are possible. The following is just an example, but such an extended example will be described.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's betting operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal slot 5 and betting, or the credited medal being placed in the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button). The game is started with one of the start conditions (operation of operating 6b to bet), and if the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 32 is driven to drive the medal payout exit 11. Although the form of paying out medals or being credited has been described, the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the present embodiment relates to all the forms in which a player bets a game value required for a game, a game is played based on the bet, and a privilege is given (for example, a game value is given) based on the result of the game. The invention according to the above is applicable. That is, not only the form in which medals are physically inserted (hanged) and the medals are paid out by the movement of the player, but also the game value possessed by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachi-slot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, it can be applied to a medal-less game that can be played at least in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value). Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine". The medalless gaming machine may be referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", or the like.

It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the game value possessed by the player, or it may be mounted on the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may be a game value management device (connected) (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal number control board"). Hereinafter, an example in which this game value management device is provided will be described.

The game value management device is a device provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 having at least a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), and a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device is described as a "connection terminal board". (There is), it is connected to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") so as to be bidirectionally communicable. The game value management device provides the game value necessary for the player to perform the game value lending operation (that is, the game value betting operation) by performing the necessary communication with the external game value providing device. (Action to play), action to give game value (that is, action to provide the player with the game value related to the grant when the winning combination related to the granting the game value is won (the winning combination is established)), and these. It is possible to perform an operation such as electromagnetically recording the game value provided by the operation of. The game value providing device may be referred to as a "game value (game medium) handling device", a "game value (game medium) lending device", a "sandwich", or the like.

Further, the external game value providing device is connected to an external ball ejection management device (ball ejection management server), and the game value management device is connected to the external ball ejection management device as a communication device and an external game value. It is configured so that the payout management information can be transmitted via the providing device. Here, the payout management information is composed of various information necessary for the external payout management device to be able to manage the payout. An example of the payout management information will be described later. Further, the external game value providing device and the external ball ejection management device are connected by, for example, an internet line.

Here, the “ball payout” directly means the number of game media paid out, but in the present embodiment, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts, etc. How much the benefits are given to the player (for example, how much the player is positive (how much the game store is negative), or how much the player is negative (how much the game store is positive) It is a concept that includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination thereof.

Further, for example, a possessed game value number display device (not shown) for displaying the possessed game value number is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the game value management device is based on the management result of the game value number. It is also possible to manage the game value number displayed on the possessed game value number display device. That is, the game value management device may be configured not only to record the total number of game values that the player can provide for the game by an electromagnetic method, but also to control the display of the recording result. .. In this case, the game value management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded game value number to an external game value providing device, and the player can freely transmit the signal. It has a performance that the recorded game value number cannot be reduced except when it is directly operated, and a signal indicating the recorded game value number has a performance that can be transmitted only via a communication device. Is desirable.

The game value management device not only has a function of electromagnetically managing the game value of the player by using an external game value providing device, but also the number of game values bet by the physical movement of the player and the pachislot machine 1. It may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical movement of. That is, it may be possible to manage the actual insertion and withdrawal of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1. By doing so, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method or can be controlled by a method such as the above-mentioned medalless gaming machine. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1. Even if there is, it can be a common configuration. Further, in this case, the game value management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and the hopper device 32 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It is also possible to adopt a method of indirectly controlling by transmitting the control result.

Further, in addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. In addition, the game value providing device includes various devices such as an insertion slot for valuable value such as banknotes, an insertion slot for a recording medium (for example, an IC card), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a returning operating means that can be operated by the player, may be provided (all not shown). The insertable recording medium includes not only non-member recording media issued on the day of the game store but also member recording media owned by the members of the game store. The game value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (it becomes invalid from the next day onward), but the game value recorded on the member recording medium is valid from the next day onward.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be described. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value to the game value providing device by either method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values according to the operation of the player to any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with the game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable values. Then, the player plays a game, and when the game value is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, when the game is ended after acquiring a predetermined number of game values according to the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the game value number to the game value providing device in response to the operation of the player to any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges a recording medium recording the transmitted game value number. The game value management device clears the game value number stored by itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the discharged recording medium to a prize exchange or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, and the discharged recording medium can be used as a game value providing device corresponding to another pachi-slot machine 1. By inserting it, you can move the table and continue the game. Further, if the discharged recording medium is a member recording medium, the game can be stopped here because it is valid from the next day onward.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, depending on the mode of the player's return operation, the game is played. It may be configured so that only the number of game values desired by the person can be transmitted. That is, the game value held by the player may be divided. Further, the game value providing device records the transmitted game value number on a recording medium and discharges it, but the same value is applied to the player's mobile terminal by using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna or the like. Information may be transmitted, and cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, for example, as long as the player is provided with equivalent value.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 or the game value providing device, a lock operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and communication between the game value management device and the game value providing device cannot be performed according to the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 or the game value providing device, for example, setting a password (and inputting the set password), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, as compared with the case where the gaming medium is physically used for the game, for example, a part of the external structure such as the medal insertion slot 5 and the medal payout outlet 11, or the selector 31 or the like. Since it is not necessary to provide a part of the internal structure of the hopper device 32 or the like, not only the cost and manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, but also the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the gaming machine. Further, since the player does not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of a medalless gaming machine)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in the case where the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value number) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication-dedicated unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits the ball ejection management information to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The payout management device is, for example, a server for payout management managed by the union (information center) to which the gaming machine maker belongs, and the transmitted payout management information is stored in the payout management device. Therefore, it is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether or not the gambling of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball ejection performance).

Therefore, from this point of view, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board play important functions in the pachi-slot machine 1 like the main control board 71, so that fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be prevented. It needs to be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration Example 1 and Configuration Example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show an example of such an embodiment.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similarly to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing treatments to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize the trace of opening (or the number of times it has been opened). (For example, a seal by caulking or affixing a seal sticker, or affixing a caulking sticker that describes the record of cutting the caulking, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as that of the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Structure example 2>
In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the configuration example 1 described above. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed therein shall be configured. The board shall be housed in an easily visible state.

Here, the medal number control board case of the configuration example 2 may be configured to be subjected to the same sealing process as the main control board case, or at least a part thereof may be sealed. You can also do it. For example, in the medal number control board case, the seal may be performed by caulking as in the main control board case, but the seal may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is obligatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The stored data example shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball ejection management device. That is, an example of the ball ejection management information transmitted by the medal number control board to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit is shown. It should be noted that this is only an example, and among the various information shown in FIG. 34, a part thereof may be configured not to be transmitted, or information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34 may be transmitted. You can also.

Further, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit is arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the ball ejection management device is also arbitrary. If the payout management device can monitor the payout performance of each gaming machine for at least one unit (for example, one business day of a game store), the ball may be transmitted at any timing. .. For example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the payout management device. Further, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of input" is the cumulative number of input per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operation to a communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for those bet by the operation of the re-game. The unit dedicated to communication transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers the information of the game value number given by the payout process of the gaming machine to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for the one given by the operation of the re-game. The communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the amusement shop).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference number generated in one unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on (in short, the difference number obtained in the period when the game value is most increased in one unit. (Referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference number and transmits the calculated information to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the game store is closed), and the communication-dedicated unit receives the information. Is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts for pachinko machines" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of various pachinko machines. .. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of various bonuses at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of various bonuses). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of continuous payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and the continuous bonuses (RB, including RB during BB operation). It is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of the continuous bonus at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of the continuous bonus). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

Further, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the combination ratio monitoring device 54), and the communication-dedicated unit receives. The information is transmitted to the ball ejection management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal number control board). The accumulated data "combined character ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "continuous accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "advantageous". The "section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "instructed accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information to be aggregated / calculated even during the AT state. The accumulated data "state ratio of accessories, etc." corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information which is the target of aggregation / calculation even during operation of various accessories.

The accumulated data "number of games" is the cumulative number of games per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), and the communication-dedicated unit accumulates the information at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game). For example, it is transmitted to the payout management device at the end of business of the game store).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is an individual identification number (also referred to as "CPUID", which is referred to as "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted.

The stored data "main control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the manufacturer code.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the product code.

The accumulated data "medal number control chip ID number" is an individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The stored data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the manufacturer code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The stored data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the product code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

In this way, the ball ejection management device can store various types of information (ball ejection management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. Further, the payout management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") capable of identifying an individual of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout management device can identify the gaming machine of the transmission source by these individual identification information, and for example, from a certain time, the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal number control chip ID number" are used. If the correspondence between the two is different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility of fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification).

In addition, the ball ejection management information includes a plurality of ball ejection information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted balls" to "number of games") that can identify the ball ejection performance per unit. Therefore, the payout management device can recognize whether or not the gambling of the source gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the payout information. For example, if the "total number of payouts" or "instructed accessory ratio" becomes extremely high from a certain time, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been performed, or there is some defect in the specification design in the first place. It is possible to recognize the possibility that there was.

When the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the ball ejection management device, it can be expected that the result will be notified to the game store, the game machine maker, or the like, and appropriate measures will be taken. That is, each is based on a plurality of managed gaming machines, a game value providing device (communication dedicated unit) that transmits the payout management information transmitted from the managed gaming machine to the payout management device, and the sent ball payout management information. By constructing a management system including a ball ejection management device that manages the ball ejection performance of the managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under control.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of gaming values possessed by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal number control board may be provided with a medal number monitoring device (not shown) so that the manager of the game store can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects various information (for example, a part or all of the above-mentioned payout management information) regarding the number of game values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. If the medal number monitoring device displays all the display contents of the combination ratio monitoring device 54, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

Further, the medal number monitoring device may be mounted on the medal number control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal number control board. May be good. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the medal number control board case. Further, a management switch for starting the display on the medal number monitoring device or switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G so that various information may be displayed when this is operated. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

The medal number monitoring device may display the type of the error state when various error states related to the medal state occur. For example, a communication error with the main control board 71 occurs, a communication error with the connection terminal board occurs, a communication error with the game value providing device occurs, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In some cases, etc., the corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order to make it easy for the manager of the game store to recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is set in or near the medal number control board case. An explanatory part (sticker sticking, printing, etc.) may be provided.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit the ball ejection management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in the present embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided to transmit information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. As a result, not only the number of parts can be reduced, but also the wiring to the outside can be reduced, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged in the vicinity at least in the cabinet G. This makes it possible to improve work efficiency at the time of connection. Further, the length of the wiring can be made constant, and the wiring location can be limited, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit the payout management information to the payout management device. Further, in the ball ejection management device, the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine can be appropriately managed by the transmitted ball ejection management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

Further, the function of appropriately managing the ball ejection performance may be provided on the medal number control board, and the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way. .. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal number control board may be configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). For example, the ball ejection monitoring RWM is initialized when the setting is changed, but is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section to monitor the ball ejection. Then, when the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold value, for example, the advantageous section itself is not forcibly terminated, but the probability of occurrence of navigation is reduced, the probability of AT state being extended is reduced, or the like. Alternatively, the AT state itself can be terminated to control the ball ejection performance. Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball ejection performance. In this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball ejection management device as the ball ejection management information. That is, both the medal number control board and the ball ejection management device may be configured to be able to manage the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Configuration example of main control board of pachislot machine)
Subsequently, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. In the following, a configuration example of reuse of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and one of them is that it is necessary to print the manufacturer name and the board control number on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the control number is a number for specifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “model A”) on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board control number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are printed. After that, when the model A is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model B"), the company Co., Ltd. AA deletes the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the lower row by laser engraving, and deletes the serial number and board control number related to the company in a different space (for example, the manufacturer in the upper row of the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22") must be newly printed.

After that, the model B was removed from the amusement shop, and for example, BB Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. must delete the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the upper row by laser engraving, and newly print the serial number and board control number related to the company in a different space. However, since there is no free space in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, the main control board 71 is reused due to the above-mentioned restrictions, although it can still be sufficiently reused in terms of hardware. There was a problem that it might not be possible.

This is the same even when a plurality of manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and the board control number related to both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed in advance, the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. are laser-engraved at the time of manufacturing the model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although there is a possibility that BB Co., Ltd. can reuse it, AA Co., Ltd. cannot reuse it. On the other hand, the following Configuration Example 2 and Configuration Example 3 can be expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, it is possible to improve the reusability of a board used for controlling a game, such as the main control board 71.

<Structure example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 shows printing a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number. In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) and others are used. Code can be used. That is, the code can be any code as long as it includes information that allows the confirmer to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal or the like). May be good.

In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first reference numeral from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when the model A is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, the model B is removed from the game store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the third from the right. The code of is deleted by laser engraving, the fourth code from the right is printed, and the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. If this is the case, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachislot machine 1.

That is, in the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer name and the board control number, the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed (printed) on the surface of the main control board 71. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve the reusability as compared with the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Structure example 3>
Configuration Example 3 shown in FIG. 35 shows that a code including a manufacturer name and a substrate control number is printed in the same manner as in Configuration Example 2 described above. In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, it is assumed that two copies of AA Co., Ltd. and two copies of BB Co., Ltd. are printed. Further, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or it may be on the main control board case corresponding thereto), the code is read by caulking the portion corresponding to each code with, for example, a band-shaped member or the like. It is possible to fix it in an impossible state. Further, for example, by cutting a strip-shaped member or the like, it is possible to release the fixing and make the code readable.

In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. Is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, model A was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was readable, and the first, third, and 4 from the right. The second code is considered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, the model B was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture the model C, only the third code from the right was readable, and the first, second and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is considered unreadable. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the fourth from the right. If only the code of No. 1 is readable and the first to third codes from the right are unreadable, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other code unreadable, further reuse is possible, and more. It is also possible to reuse it at the game machine manufacturer. Also in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is possible to provide only the caulking hole and to print the code at the portion corresponding to the caulking hole each time it is reused.

[10. Second game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 60, another specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a “second game machine”. It should be noted that, with respect to various specifications and functions described as the second gaming machine in the present embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to those described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment. With respect to various specifications, functions, and the like described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to those described as the second gaming machine in the present embodiment. That is, an invention in which these are appropriately combined can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

Further, the second gaming machine has different specifications regarding the game performance from the first gaming machine, but the basic control regarding the progress of the game and the basic control regarding the execution of the effect are the first game. It is the same as the machine. That is, also in the second gaming machine, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 rotates, stops, and imparts gaming value to each reel by executing various processes shown in FIGS. 23 to 32. It shifts the game state, updates information on various counters and flags required for various controls, and performs various controls related to production execution and information notification on the main side. Further, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes various processes shown in FIG. 33 as an example thereof, thereby performing various controls related to effect execution and information notification on the sub side. It should be noted that the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 may appropriately perform the control processing necessary for realizing the playability described below, and the method can be appropriately changed as long as the gist of the invention is not deviated. , In the second gaming machine, the detailed description of each of such various processes is omitted.

In the second gaming machine, the effective line is defined as only one line of a predetermined irregular line connecting the middle stage region of the reel 3L, the middle stage region of the reel 3C, and the upper stage region of the reel 3R. Further, in the second gaming machine, as a gaming state related to the lottery probability of the internal winning combination (see FIGS. 48 and 49 described later), a non-bonus state “F_2BB” described later is carried over between the 2BB flags. And, between the 3BB flags where "F_3BB" described later is carried over, between the non-flags where none of the bonus combinations are won (not carried over), and the RB game state (BB game state) which is a bonus state. Consists of including.

Since the RB game state is always controlled during the BB game state, for example, "RB" shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later, indicates the RB game state and the BB game state. Further, the bonus state is configured to include a 2BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 2BB and a 3BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 3BB. To. The 2BB state is configured to end when more than one medal is paid out during the state, and the 3BB state is configured to end when more than 53 medals are paid out during the state. .. Further, when the setting is changed between the 2BB flags, the information indicating that the 2BB is carried over (the information of the carry-over combination storage area related to the 2BB) is not cleared, so that the setting is changed between the 2BB flags. continue. On the other hand, when the setting is changed between the 3BB flags, the information carried over by the 3BB (the information of the carry-over combination storage area related to the 3BB) is cleared, so that the setting is changed between the non-flags.

Further, in the second gaming machine, it is possible to play a game in a state where two medals are bet (two-card bet state) and a state where three medals are bet (three-card bet state). There is. More specifically, in the non-bonus state, it is possible to play the game in either the 2-card bet state or the 3-card bet state, and in the bonus state, it is possible to play the game only in the 3-card bet state. It is composed of. Further, in the second gaming machine, as in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play a game in a three-card bet state between the 2BB flags. That is, the three-card bet state between the 2BB flags is the "recommended game state". Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the following description will be made on the premise that the game is performed in the recommended gaming state.

[10-1. Playability of the second gaming machine]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 46. 36 to 39 are diagrams showing an example of a transition flow of a gaming state in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the second gaming machine, and FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a detailed gaming flow of the CZ2 state. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a detailed game flow from the AT state to the judge state, and FIGS. 42 to 46 are examples of various tables in the second gaming machine. It is a figure which shows.

Similar to the first gaming machine, the second gaming machine is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section as a state in which the player plays a game, and as shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the gaming in the non-advantageous section. A standby state is provided as a game state related to sex, and a normal state, a precursor state, a CZ state, an RB state, a BB state, an AT state, a judge state, and an ending state are provided as game states related to the gameability of an advantageous section. Is provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 36, a rough playability in the second gaming machine will be described. In most cases, the player starts the game from the normal state. In the normal state, first, the game is performed with the aim of shifting to the RB state or the BB state, which is a pseudo-bonus state. In the meantime, it may shift to a precursory state or a CZ state. When the transferred pseudo-bonus state is the RB state, if the RB state ends as it is, the advantageous section also ends, and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. The standby state is positioned as a state in which the transition to the advantageous section (that is, the playability in the advantageous section is exhibited) is waited. That is, shifting to the standby state means that it is necessary to play the game again with the aim of shifting to the RB state or the BB state, which is a pseudo-bonus state, in the same flow.

When the transferred pseudo-bonus state is the BB state, or when the RB state is promoted to the BB state, the state shifts to the AT state when the BB state ends. The AT state is composed of 30 games per set (1 unit), and when one set of games is exhausted, the state shifts to the judge state. In the judge state, an extension propriety decision is made to determine whether or not to extend the AT state. When it is decided to extend the AT state in the judge state, the AT state may be extended to the next set via the BB state, or the AT state may be extended to the next set as it is. On the other hand, when it is decided not to extend the AT state in the judge state, the advantageous section ends and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. That is, a series of advantageous states composed of the BB state and the AT state ends.

The second game machine is also equipped with a game number limiter "1500 (times)" and a payout number limiter "2400 (sheets)", and the number of games in the advantageous section (value of the advantageous section game number counter). Is 1500 games or more, or when the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section (value of the advantageous section payout counter) exceeds 2400, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and the standby state of the non-advantageous section is reached. Move to. However, in the BB state, AT state, and judge state, when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section becomes 1800 or more, the ending transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the ending state is performed until the advantageous section is forcibly completed. The ending state continues. Then, when any of the limiters is activated in the ending state, the advantageous section ends, and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section.

That is, the player aims to shift to the BB state, and after the end, the AT state is extended (extended) (when extended via the BB state, a more preferable game result is obtained). In addition, when the AT state shifts to the ending state as a result of continuous villas, medals can be obtained until the limiter is activated. The above is the rough playability.

(Standby state)
Subsequently, the standby state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. As described above, the standby state is configured as a gaming state in a non-advantageous section.

In the standby state, for example, an advantageous section transition lottery, a ceiling bonus type lottery, a ceiling game number lottery, and an initial NP lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed.

<Advantageous section transition lottery>
In the standby state, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed for each game to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, the internal winning combination is described later as “off”, “replay” and “ When it is one of "special", it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and when the internal winning combination is other, it is always decided to shift to the advantageous section. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, whether the advantageous section of the transition destination is further set to the normal state or the precursory state (that is, via each precursory state, the CZ described later). Whether to shift to the state, RB state, or BB state) can be determined. Of course, in the lottery, it can be configured so that it can be determined to shift to the CZ state, the RB state, or the BB state without going through the precursor state.

It should be noted that, although it is only an example, in the lottery, for example, when the internal winning combination is either the "pushing order bell" or the "common bell" described later, it is determined to shift to the normal state of the advantageous section, and the inside It is decided to shift to the CZ state of the advantageous section when the winning combination is any of the "cherry", "watermelon" and "chance eye" described later, and it is advantageous when the internal winning combination is the "strong bell" described later. It can be configured so that it is determined to shift to the RB state of the section, and when the internal winning combination is the “determined combination” described later, it is determined to shift to the BB state of the advantageous section. Further, in this case, it may be determined whether or not to go through the precursory state. Further, in any case, it may be determined to shift to either state by lottery with a predetermined probability. Further, in any case, the number of precursor games in the precursor state is one from within a predetermined number of games (for example, a maximum of 32 games) by the lottery (or a lottery of the number of precursor games which is another lottery). It may be decided, or a predetermined number of games may be set.

<Ceiling bonus type lottery>
In the standby state, if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery, the ceiling bonus type lottery is performed. The second gaming machine is also equipped with a so-called ceiling function, and when the number of games played without shifting to the pseudo-bonus state in the advantageous section reaches the number of ceiling games, it shifts to the pseudo-bonus state. It has become a thing. The lottery determines the type of pseudo-bonus state of the transition destination in this case. For example, the number of ceiling games starts counting when the player shifts to the advantageous section, and the count is cleared when the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus state. In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, the ceiling is reached with a probability of 50%, for example, according to a predetermined probability. The type of pseudo-bonus state at the time is determined to be the RB state, and the type of the pseudo-bonus state at the time of reaching the ceiling is determined to be the BB state with a probability of remaining 50%.

<Ceiling game number lottery>
If the ceiling bonus type lottery is performed in the standby state, the ceiling game number lottery is performed. Although the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, in the lottery, for example, from within a predetermined number of games (for example, a maximum of 640 games). The number of games is determined. Further, in the lottery, the result of the ceiling bonus type lottery may be referred to. For example, when this result is in the RB state, it may be easier to determine a relatively short number of games as compared with the case in the BB state. Further, in the lottery, a plurality of games such as 1 to 128 games, 129 to 256 games, 257 to 384 games, 385 to 512 games, and 513 to 640 games can be easily set so that the player can easily determine the degree of expectation. Zones may be defined so that the number of games in a predetermined zone (for example, 129 to 256 games or 385 to 512 games) can be relatively easily determined as the number of ceiling games.

<Initial NP lottery>
In the standby state, if it is determined to shift to the advantageous section as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery, the initial NP lottery is performed. In the second gaming machine, information that contributes to the determination of whether or not to shift to a more advantageous state (for example, CZ state or pseudo-bonus state) in the normal state (in other words, to change the degree of advantage in the normal state). Information), it is possible to give points called "NP". Then, when the advantageous section is started, the initial value of NP can be given. The lottery determines the initial value of this NP. In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, the lottery is performed with a probability according to the internal winning combination, and "30. , "50", "70", or "99" NP is given. However, it is also possible to determine "0" (that is, no NP is given) as a lottery result. It is also possible to make it possible to determine "100" (that is, the maximum value of NP is given) as a lottery result.

As described above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the standby state, when the transition destination is the normal state (advantageous section start (normal)), the next game shifts to the normal state, and the transition destination becomes. When it is in the precursory state (start of advantageous section (precursor)), it shifts from the next game to the precursory state (as described above, when it is possible to shift without going through the precursory state, the next game is changed to the target game state. Transition).

(Normal state)
Subsequently, a normal state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. As described above, the normal state is configured as a gaming state in an advantageous section.

In the normal state, for example, a lottery for granting NP, a lottery for NPMAX, a lottery for each established combination, a lottery for the number of precursor games, and a lottery for shifting to the normal middle state are performed. It should be noted that these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed.

As described above, the normal state is a gaming state in which the player usually stays most often, and the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. In this way, the game state that is disadvantageous to the player even in the advantageous section (in other words, the game state in which the medals do not increase or are difficult to increase due to the notification of the stop operation information) is the "directing section" of the advantageous section. , Or may also be referred to as a "normally advantageous section" or the like.

<NP grant lottery>
In the normal state, an NP grant lottery is performed to determine whether or not to grant NP for each game. As described above, the NP is a point as information for changing the degree of advantage in the normal state, and in the second gaming machine, when the cumulative value of the given NP becomes "100" or more, it will be described later. A lottery is performed at the time of NPMAX, and a transition to another advantageous gaming state may be determined. In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, the lottery is performed with a probability according to the internal winning combination, and "0". The assigned value of any NP is determined in the range of "99". However, it is also possible to prevent the lottery result from being determined as "0" (that is, no NP is given). It is also possible to make it possible to determine "100" (that is, the maximum value of NP is given) as a lottery result. Further, in the lottery, not only the internal winning combination but also, for example, the "bell ream number" described later (that is, the continuous display number of "bell" (including the case where it is displayed once)) is used, and the "bell ream" is used. It is also possible to make it possible to determine the assigned value of NP according to the "number".

<lottery at NPMAX>
In the normal state, when the cumulative value of NP becomes "100" or more as a result of the NP grant lottery, the NPMAX lottery is performed. Here, when the lottery is performed, the NP is initialized (cleared to 0) regardless of the lottery result. That is, in the normal state, every time the granted NP reaches a predetermined value (100 or more), it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege to the player. In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, the lottery shifts to any gaming state, for example, according to a predetermined probability. Do not, shift to the BB state via the precursor state (as described above, it may not go through the precursor state), shift to the CZ2 state via the precursor state (precursor) As mentioned above, it may not go through the state).

The CZ state that shifts when the given NP reaches a predetermined value (100 or more) basically corresponds to the CZ2 state, but in the lottery, the sign state is passed through. It may be possible to determine the transition to the CZ1 state (as described above, it may not go through the precursory state). Further, in the lottery, it is not determined to shift to the RB state via the precursor state (as described above, it may not pass through the precursor state), but this can be determined. You may do so.

<Lottery by winning combination>
In the normal state, a lottery for each winning combination is performed to determine whether or not to grant the privilege according to the determined internal winning combination (established combination) for each game. In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, any game according to a predetermined probability for each winning combination. It does not shift to the state, it shifts to the BB state via the precursor state (as mentioned above, it may not go through the precursor state), and it shifts to the CZ1 state via the precursor state. One of the things to do (as mentioned above, which may not go through the precursory state) is to be determined.

In addition, the CZ state that shifts according to the winning in the lottery by winning combination basically corresponds to the CZ1 state, but in the lottery, it shifts to the CZ2 state via the precursor state. (As described above, it may not go through the precursory state) may be determined. Further, in the lottery, it is not determined to shift to the RB state via the precursor state (as described above, it may not pass through the precursor state), but this can be determined. You may do so.

<Lottery of the number of precursor games>
In the normal state, when it is determined by the above-mentioned NPMAX lottery or lottery by established combination to shift to any of the gaming states via the precursor state, the precursor game number lottery is performed. That is, the game period in the precursory state is determined. Although the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, in the lottery, for example, from within a predetermined number of games (for example, a maximum of 32 games). The number of games is determined. Further, in the lottery, the game state of the transition destination may be referred to. For example, when it is the CZ state that shifts via the precursor state, it may be easier to determine a relatively short number of games as compared with the case of the BB state.

<Normal state transition lottery>
In the normal state, since the transition probability to the CZ state is changed, the CZ1 high probability state in which the transition probability to the CZ1 state is given preferential treatment and the CZ1 low probability state in which the transition probability to the CZ1 state is lower than the CZ1 high probability state. A CZ2 high probability state in which the transition probability to the CZ2 state is given preferential treatment, and a CZ2 low probability state in which the transition probability to the CZ2 state is lower than the CZ2 high probability state are provided.

In addition, various modes can be adopted as the mode in which the transition probability to the CZ1 state is given preferential treatment in the CZ1 high probability state. For example, in the CZ1 high probability state, the probability that it is determined to shift to the CZ1 state in the lottery by winning combination may be given preferential treatment over the CZ1 low probability state, or in the NPMAX lottery, the transition to the CZ1 state may occur. The probability that it is determined may be given preferential treatment over the CZ1 low probability state.

In addition, various modes can be adopted as the mode in which the transition probability to the CZ2 state is given preferential treatment in the CZ2 high probability state. For example, in the CZ2 high probability state, the grant of NP may be given preferential treatment in the lottery for granting NP (it becomes easier to win the grant of NP, or the number of NPs granted when winning is relatively large). However, the probability that it is decided to shift to the CZ2 state in the lottery at the time of NPMAX may be given preferential treatment over the CZ2 low probability state, or the probability that it is decided to shift to the CZ2 state in the lottery by winning combination. May be given preferential treatment over the CZ2 low probability state.

Further, the CZ1 low accuracy / high accuracy state and the CZ2 low accuracy / high accuracy state are managed separately. Therefore, in the normal state, (a) CZ1 low probability state + CZ2 low probability state, (b) CZ1 high probability state + CZ2 low probability state, (c) CZ1 low probability state + CZ2 high probability state, (d) CZ1 high probability state + CZ2 It may be in one of the high-accuracy states. Then, in the normal state, the states may be suggested or notified individually or in combination for each of the CZ1 low-accuracy / high-accuracy state and the CZ2 low-accuracy / high-accuracy state. That is, in the normal state, an effect that makes it possible to guess or recognize which state (a) to (d) is in the above-mentioned state may be executed, or at least in the case of the above-mentioned case (a). By making the production contents different from those of the above-mentioned cases (b) to (d), it is possible to guess or recognize that the person is staying in one of the advantageous states, but the above-mentioned (b) to (b) to It may be possible to perform an effect that is difficult to guess or recognize which of (d) you are staying in.

Further, the CZ1 high-accuracy state and the CZ2 high-accuracy state may be configured to continue for each predetermined number of games, and when staying in each of them, a fall lottery may occur in the normal medium state transition lottery. It may be configured to be done so that its duration is determined. In the following, the former case will be described as an example.

In the normal state, when the CZ1 is in the low probability state, the normal medium state transition lottery is performed as a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the CZ1 high probability state. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, according to the probability predetermined for each winning combination, the CZ1 high accuracy. Whether or not to shift to the state is determined, and if it is decided to shift, the number of staying games (for example, one of "10", "20", or "30" games) is determined. .. Further, in the normal state, when the CZ2 is in the low probability state, the normal medium state transition lottery is performed as a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the CZ2 high probability state. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, according to the probability predetermined for each winning combination, the CZ2 high accuracy. Whether or not to shift to the state is determined, and if it is decided to shift, the number of staying games (for example, one of "10", "20", or "30" games) is determined. ..

As described above, when it is determined to shift to the CZ state or the pseudo-bonus state in the normal state, it shifts to the precursor state corresponding to each (precursor transition). As described above, when the transition is possible without going through the precursor state, the transition is made from the next game to the target game state.

Here, the opportunity to shift from the normal state to another gaming state will be listed and described again.
(1) When the number of games played without shifting to the pseudo-bonus state reaches the number of ceiling games (in this case, the number of games played before reaching the number of ceiling games is shifted to the precursor state during the predetermined number of games. May be good)
(2) When the game state transition is won in the NPMAX lottery (3) When the game state transition is won in the winning combination lottery (Note that when the game state transition is won in the "fixed role" described later, the BB state is always BB state. Will be decided to move to)

That is, in the second gaming machine, there is always a possibility that the above-mentioned triggers (1) to (3) are established in the normal state, and the transition probability to the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state may fluctuate. Therefore, the player can always play the game with expectation.

(Precursor state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, the precursory state in the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, the precursory state is configured as a gaming state in an advantageous section.

In the precursory state, for example, a lottery for granting NP, a lottery for NPMAX, and a lottery for each established combination are performed. It should be noted that these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed.

As described above, the precursor state is a gaming state in which the transition to the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, RB state, or BB state has been determined, but the transition is awaited, and the stop operation is advantageous to the player. Information is not reported in the game state. That is, it is a gaming state that constitutes the above-mentioned "effect section" or "normally advantageous section". The CZ1 precursor state indicates the precursor state of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 precursor state indicates the precursor state of the CZ2 state, the RB precursor state indicates the precursor state of the RB state, and the BB precursor state indicates the precursor state of the BB state. It shows the state.

Since the NP grant lottery, the NPMAX lottery, and the lottery by established combination in the precursory state are basically the same as those in the normal state, the description here is omitted, but for example, in the precursory state, the above-mentioned (1) When the opportunity of (3) is established and a migration destination that is more advantageous than the currently determined migration destination is determined, the precursor state is rewritten to the precursor state corresponding to the migration destination. In this case, the number of precursor games may be newly determined or may be taken over as it is.

For example, when it is determined to shift to the RB state or the BB state in the CZ1 precursor state or the CZ2 precursor state, the precursor state is rewritten to the RB precursor state or the BB precursor state. Further, for example, when it is determined to shift to the BB precursor state in the RB precursor state, the precursor state is rewritten to the BB precursor state. In such a case, since the precursor effect is executed in the precursor state, even if the promotion effect suggesting that the player has been promoted to a more advantageous state is executed there, the player is notified. good.

Further, the superiority or inferiority may or may not be added between the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state. For example, if it is decided to shift to the CZ2 state in the CZ1 precursor state, and if the CZ2 state is more advantageous than the CZ1 state, the precursor state may be rewritten to the CZ2 precursor state. Well, if there is no superiority or inferiority between the CZ2 state and the CZ1 state, or if the CZ2 state is more disadvantageous than the CZ1 state, the result determined to shift to the CZ2 state is discarded and the CZ1 precursor state is discarded. You can leave it as it is. Further, in this case, the result determined to shift to the CZ2 state is stored (stocked) as a right, and if the CZ1 state shifted from the CZ1 precursor state does not shift to the pseudo bonus state, the result is stored. The stored right may be consumed and the CZ2 state may be initiated.

Further, when it is decided to shift to the BB state in the RB precursor state, the result determined to shift to the RB state is discarded when the precursor state is rewritten, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The result determined to move to the BB state is stored (stocked) as a right so that after the RB state is executed, the stored right is consumed and the BB state is started. You may. Further, when it is decided to shift to the BB state in the BB precursor state, rewriting does not occur, and the result determined to shift to the BB state later is discarded, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The result decided to move to the BB state later is stored (stocked) as a right, and after the BB state is executed, the stored right is consumed and the BB state is started. You may do it.

As described above, when the games for the determined number of precursor games are performed in the precursor state (precursor G number = 0), the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to each precursor state (CZ start, RB start, or BB start).

(CZ1 state)
Subsequently, the CZ1 state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 38. As described above, the CZ1 state is configured as a gaming state in an advantageous section.

The basic playability of the CZ1 state is as follows.
(1) 7 games are set as one set (1 unit), and this is set as the CZ1 normal state.

(2) In the normal state of CZ1, BB lottery is performed in CZ1. The BB lottery in CZ1 is a lottery in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the BB state according to a predetermined probability for each game and winning combination. If the lottery is won, the CZ is successful and the CZ1 state is reached. Is finished, and the next game shifts to the BB state.

(3) In the normal state of CZ1, the navigation lottery during CZ1 is performed. In the CZ1 middle navigation lottery, whether or not to execute the navigation in the final state of the CZ1 according to the probability predetermined for each game and the winning combination, and if the navigation is executed, the type of the navigation (4 choice navigation, 2). Selective navigation, all navigation) will be decided. That is, in the CZ1 normal state, it is determined whether or not to grant the navigation right in the CZ1 final state.

(4) After digesting 7 games in the CZ1 normal state, if the "pushing order bell" described later is won (when the pushing order bell is established), the game shifts to the CZ1 final state (1 game).

(5) In the final state of CZ1, if it is decided to execute the navigation by the CZ1 navigation lottery, the navigation is executed with the determined contents, and if it is not decided to execute the navigation, the navigation is performed. If there is no such thing and the "bell" is displayed in any case, the CZ is successful and it is decided to at least shift to the pseudo-bonus state. Here, in the CZ1 state, it is possible to loop the above-mentioned flow from the CZ1 normal state to the CZ1 final state up to three times, the first time being "rank 1" and the next second time being "rank 2". , The final third time is defined as "Rank 3".

(6) If the CZ is successful in the final state of the CZ1, the CZ1 reward lottery will be performed. The CZ1 reward lottery is a lottery for determining the content of the privilege (type of the pseudo bonus state to be transferred) when the CZ is successful in the CZ1 state, and the higher the rank, the more advantageous the privilege is given to the player. It has become like.

(7) If the CZ is successful at rank 1, the CZ1 reward lottery will be performed and the type of the pseudo-bonus state of the transfer destination will be determined, but the pseudo-bonus state will not be immediately transferred to the pseudo-bonus state, and the rank will be increased to rank 2. In this state, the CZ1 normal state is resumed (the second time is started). On the other hand, when CZ fails at rank 1 (that is, when "bell" is not displayed in the final state of CZ1), the CZ1 state ends without shifting to the pseudo bonus state, and the state shifts to the normal state. (That is, the CZ1 state fails and ends). In this case, a normal medium state transition lottery is performed to determine the state in the normal state of the transition destination (CZ1 low accuracy / high accuracy state, CZ2 low accuracy / high accuracy state). Since the lottery for shifting to the normal middle state is basically the same as that in the normal state, the description here is omitted, but for example, in the lottery in the CZ1 state, the CZ1 state fails and ends. In order to relieve the game, it may be determined (or with high probability) that the CZ1 high probability state of a predetermined number of games will be reached.

(8) If the CZ is successful at rank 2, the CZ1 reward lottery is performed with a lottery probability more advantageous than that of rank 1, and the type of the pseudo bonus state of the transfer destination is determined. However, in this case as well, as in the case of rank 1, it does not immediately shift to the pseudo-bonus state, but shifts to the CZ1 normal state again with the rank up to rank 3 (the third time is started). On the other hand, if the CZ fails at rank 2, the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery at rank 1 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with the success of rank 1).

(9) If the CZ is successful at rank 3, the CZ1 reward lottery is performed with a lottery probability more advantageous than that of rank 2, and the type of the pseudo bonus state of the transfer destination is determined. Then, it shifts to the pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery of rank 3 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with the success of rank 3). On the other hand, if the CZ fails at rank 3, the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery at rank 2 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with the success of rank 2).

<BB lottery in CZ1>
In the CZ1 state, a BB lottery in CZ1 is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the BB state according to each game and the determined internal winning combination (established combination). In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, a weak rare role (“cherry” or “watermelon” described later) is used. When winning, it is decided to shift to the BB state with a low probability, and when winning a strong rare role (“chance eye” or “strong bell” described later), it is decided to shift to the BB state with a medium probability. When a fixed combination (“determined combination” described later) is won, it is determined that the player will shift to the BB state with 100% (or high probability). When it is decided to shift to the BB state, it may go through the precursor state or may shift to the BB state without going through. In the former case, the game may shift to the BB precursor state after the number of precursor games has been exhausted, and in the latter case, the game may shift to the BB state from the next game.

<CZ1 navigation lottery>
In the CZ1 state, CZ1 navigation for determining whether or not to execute navigation in the CZ1 final state (and its type) according to each game (excluding the CZ1 final state) and the determined internal winning combination (established combination). A lottery will be held. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, according to the probability predetermined for each winning combination, "no navigation". , "4 choice navigation", "2 choice navigation", or "all navigation" is determined. For example, if the right of "2-choice navigation" is granted, the right of "4-choice navigation" is not granted (or even if the grant is decided, it is destroyed), and the right of "all navigation" is granted. If it is granted, the rights of "4-choice navigation" and "2-choice navigation" are not granted (or even if the grant is decided, they are destroyed). That is, in the CZ1 normal state, the CZ1 navigation lottery is performed for each game, but finally, the most advantageous navigation right granted during the game period is used in the CZ1 final state.

<CZ1 reward lottery>
When the "bell" is displayed in the final state of CZ1, the CZ1 reward lottery is performed. As described above, in the lottery, the type of pseudo-bonus state of the migration destination is determined according to the current rank. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, when the rank is 1, the CZ2 reward lottery (see FIG. 42 described later). ), The type of reward is determined with the same probability as when the cumulative CP is "5", and when the rank is 2, the type of reward is determined with the same probability as when the cumulative CP of the CZ2 reward lottery is "8". When the rank is 3, the type of reward can be determined with the same probability as in the case of the cumulative CP "15 to 19" of the CZ2 reward lottery.

As described above, in the CZ1 state, for example, in the CZ1 normal state, the BB lottery in CZ1 and the navigation lottery in CZ1 are performed, and in the final state of CZ1, the CZ1 reward lottery and the normal medium state transition lottery are performed. These lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed. Further, it is possible to shift from the BB state or the AT state to the CZ1 state, and in the CZ1 state, the right to extend the BB state or the AT state can be granted (the CZ1 state). After the end of, it returns to the original state).

Further, the CZ1 state is a gaming state in which there is a high expectation that the CZ1 reward lottery will shift to a pseudo-bonus state rather than the normal state, but basically, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. It is in a game state. Therefore, the CZ1 state is a gaming state that constitutes the above-mentioned "effect section" or "normally advantageous section" as its overall configuration. However, in the final state of CZ1, there is a possibility that the number of medals will increase due to the notification of information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. It can also be said to be an "increasing section" which is a gaming state (in other words, a gaming state in which medals increase or are likely to increase due to notification of stop operation information).

As described above, when the CZ1 state is started, it becomes the CZ1 normal state, and in the CZ1 normal state, it is determined that when the BB lottery in CZ1 is won, the state shifts to the BB state. Also, if you win the CZ1 navigation lottery, you will be granted one of the navigation execution rights. In this way, after digesting 7 games in the CZ1 normal state, if the "pushing order bell" described later is applied, the CZ1 final state is reached, and if the navigation execution right is granted in the CZ1 final state, the navigation execution right is given according to the content of the right. Navigation is executed, and if it is not granted, navigation will not be executed. In either case, if "bell" is displayed, CZ is successful, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be transferred is determined by the CZ1 reward lottery. In the case of rank 3, the CZ1 state ends as it is, but in the case of rank 1 and rank 2, the CZ1 state is ranked up and continues to the next set. If "bell" is not displayed in the final state of CZ1, in the case of rank 1, CZ fails and the CZ1 state ends. In addition, if the CZ is successful even once (in the case of rank 2 and rank 3), the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state of the type determined up to that point. In this case, if it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus state after passing through the precursor state, the transition to the corresponding precursor state is performed. On the other hand, when the CZ1 state ends, the CZ does not succeed even once, and if the CZ fails, the state shifts to the normal state.

In the final state of CZ1, a CZ1 challenge effect is performed to suggest to the player that the privilege will be given if the "bell" is finally displayed. The CZ1 challenge effect basically continues until the third stop operation, and if the "bell" is finally displayed by the third stop operation, the challenge success effect is performed. However, when the push order is incorrect during the first stop operation or the second stop operation, and the stop display mode of the stopped reel is such that the "bell" can no longer be displayed (for example,). The player recognizes that the "bell" can no longer be displayed when the "bell" symbol does not stop in the main display window 4 or when the "bell" symbol does not stop on a specific line. In the case where the stop display is displayed in the above mode), the challenge failure effect is performed at that point, and the CZ1 challenge effect ends. On the other hand, when the push order is incorrect during the first stop operation or the second stop operation, but the stop display mode of the stopped reel is such that "bell" can still be displayed (for example, main). Stop display in a manner recognized by the player that the "bell" can still be displayed, such as when the "bell" symbol stops in the display window 4 or when the "bell" symbol stops on a specific line. (If this is the case), the challenge failure effect is not performed at that time, the CZ1 challenge effect continues, and the situation is reached when the "bell" cannot be displayed (for example, during the second stop operation). In that case, the challenge failure effect is performed at the time of the second stop operation, and at the time of the third stop operation when the situation occurs during the third stop operation).

That is, in the predetermined expectation effect (CZ1 challenge effect), the failure effect is executed at that stage when there is no possibility that the privilege is given from the so-called visual point of view (predetermined expectation effect). However, if there is a possibility that the privilege will be granted, the failure effect will not be executed until the possibility disappears (the predetermined expectation effect will not end). As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate expectation effect as the game progresses. It should be noted that the effect specification of such an expectation effect can be applied not only to the final state of CZ1 but also to the effect executed in other states. For example, in other states, when a specific push order combination (for example, "push order bell") is won, if a specific result (for example, "bell") is displayed, some privilege is given. Moreover, in a state where "all navigation" may not occur (for example, CZ2 normal state, AT state, or judge state), the same challenge effect may be executed using the above specifications. ..

(CZ2 state)
Subsequently, the CZ2 state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 38, 40, and 42. As described above, the CZ2 state is configured as a gaming state in an advantageous section.

The basic playability of the CZ2 state is as follows.
(1) Count the number of times the "bell" was not displayed (number of bell spills) in the game that won the "push order bell" described later, and set the number of bell spills to 7 as one set (1 unit). (The CZ2 state is different from the CZ1 state and ends in one set), and this is set as the CZ2 normal state.

(2) In the normal state of CZ2, a lottery for granting CP is performed. In the second gaming machine, information that contributes to the determination of whether or not to shift to a more advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in the CZ2 state (in other words, information for changing the degree of advantage in the CZ2 state). It is possible to give points called "CP". In the CP grant lottery, it is decided whether or not to grant this CP. As will be described later, the CZ grant lottery includes an initial grant CP lottery, a normal CP grant lottery, and a special CP grant lottery, and the details of the lottery will be described later.

(3) In the normal state of CZ2, the navigation lottery during CZ2 is performed. In the CZ2 state, basically, CP is accumulated in the CZ2 normal state, and when the number of bell spills reaches 7 and the transition to the CZ2 final state is entered, the CP grant status should be the predetermined status (5 points or more). If CZ is successful, it will shift to a pseudo-bonus state. Then, one of the granting conditions for granting CP in the normal state of CZ2 is that the "bell" is displayed in the game that wins the "pushing order bell" described later. In the CZ2 middle navigation lottery, when the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination in the CZ2 normal state, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation which is advantageous for displaying the "bell". The details of the lottery will be described later.

(4) If it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus state before one set is digested in the CZ2 normal state, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state determined to shift is made, but the decision is made. If one set is digested without fail, the game shifts to the final state of CZ2 consisting of one game. In the final state of CZ2, a lottery for granting CP is performed. That is, the CP accumulated in the CZ2 normal state may be further added in the CZ2 final state.

(5) In the final state of CZ2, the result of the CP grant lottery in the state is also taken into consideration, and when the cumulatively added CP is 5 points or more, the CZ2 reward lottery is performed. The CZ2 reward lottery is a lottery for determining the content of the privilege (type of pseudo bonus state to be transferred) when the CZ is successful in the CZ2 state, and the larger the number of CP points, the more advantageous the privilege for the player. It is supposed to be granted. On the other hand, in the final state of CZ2, even if the result of the CP grant lottery in the state is taken into consideration, if the cumulatively added CP is less than 5 points, the CZ2 reward lottery is not performed and the CZ fails. The CZ2 state ends (in this case, a normal medium state transition lottery is performed to determine each state in the normal state of the migration destination, as in the case where the CZ1 state ends with a CZ failure. , In the lottery in the CZ2 state, in order to relieve the fact that the CZ2 state has failed and ended, it may be determined without fail (or with a high probability) that the CZ2 high probability state of a predetermined number of games will be reached. ).

<CP grant lottery>
As described above, the CP grant lottery includes an initial CP grant lottery, a normal CP grant lottery, and a special CP grant lottery. The initial CP grant lottery is performed when the CZ2 state is started (for example, when the start game of the CZ2 normal state or the transition to the CZ2 state), and the initial value of the CP in the CZ2 state is determined. Further, the normal CP grant lottery is performed in each game during the CZ2 state (including not only the CZ2 normal state but also the CZ2 final state). Further, the special CP grant lottery is performed in the final state of CZ2.

The initial CP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the initial CP grant lottery table shown in FIG. 42, and "0" is determined as the initial CP with a probability of 128/256 (that is, the initial value of CP is not assigned). Is determined), "1" to "3" are determined as the initial CP with a probability of 32/256, and "5" is determined as the initial CP with a probability of 32/256 (that is, pseudo by CZ2 reward lottery). It is confirmed that it will shift to the bonus state). It should be noted that these decision probabilities and decision contents are examples. For example, as a result of the lottery, it may be decided to give a CP exceeding 5 points with a predetermined probability.

The normal CP grant lottery is performed, for example, when the display result is "bell" (that is, when the symbol combination of "bell" is stopped and displayed by the player's stop operation). , When the internal winning combination of the game is the "strong bell" described later, CP "1" is always given. In these cases, the CP grant value may be further determined by lottery. For example, when the display result is "bell", it is decided to give CP "1" with a probability of 128/256, and it is decided to give CP "2" with a probability of 128/256. In addition, when the internal winning combination of the game is "strong bell", it is determined that CP "1" is given with a probability of 64/256, and CP "2" is given with a probability of 192/256. It may be decided to do.

Further, when the internal winning combination of the game is the "fixed combination" described later, CP "10" is always given. In this case, the CP grant value may be further determined by lottery. For example, if the internal winning combination of the game is a "fixed combination", it is determined that CP "10" is given with a probability of 128/256, and CP "20" is given with a probability of 128/256. It may be decided to do.

Further, in the normal CP grant lottery, the target roles for CP grant are the "push order bell", "common bell", "strong bell" and "fixed role" described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. Even when "cherry", "watermelon", "chance eye", etc. are determined as internal winning combinations, CP may be given with a predetermined probability. The same applies when an internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination shown here is determined, and the same applies when a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown here is stopped and displayed. Further, the CP grant value can be determined according to the "number of bells" described later by using the "number of bells" (that is, the number of consecutive display times of "bell" (including the case where the "bell" is displayed once)). (That is, the more times the "bell" is displayed in succession, the larger the CP grant value).

The special CP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the special CP grant lottery table shown in FIG. 42, and when the current CP is 4 or less (that is, the CZ2 reward lottery is not performed and the state shifts to the pseudo bonus state. When the CP is 5 or more (that is, when the CZ2 reward lottery is performed and it can be decided to move to the pseudo-bonus state), the CP is included in the case where the grant probability is different. The assigned value is determined. The granted CP "= 5 is set" means that the CP is updated to "5" regardless of the cumulative grant result of the current CP, and the granted CP "+5" and "+10" are the current CPs. It is shown that each value is added to the cumulative grant result of CP.

That is, for example, when the current CP is 4 or less, the game shifts to the CZ2 final state, and even if the result of the normal CP grant lottery does not make this 5 or more, the "cherry" or "watermelon" described later is won. If possible, "= 5 is set" is determined with a probability of 232/256, "+5" is determined with a probability of 16/256, and "+10" is determined with a probability of 8/256, so the CZ2 reward is determined. It can be in a state where lottery can be performed. Further, for example, when the current CP is 5 or more and the CZ2 final state is entered, the CZ2 reward lottery is still performed as it is, but the "cherry" and "watermelon" described later are won. If it can be done, "+5" is determined with a probability of 16/256 and "+10" is determined with a probability of 8/256, so that the reward (privilege) obtained by the CZ2 reward lottery can be more advantageous. It can enhance the sex. That is, regardless of the game result in the CZ2 normal state, the CZ2 final state is configured as a state in which the player's expectation can be significantly improved.

Although not shown, in the CZ2 state, the grant status notification for suggesting or notifying the current CP grant status is performed (the same applies to the above-mentioned NP and the later-described AP). For example, a gauge-like display is made in a predetermined area of the main effect display unit 21, and if it is in the CZ2 state, the gauge is divided into five. For example, if the current CP is "1", one gauge is displayed. If the display mode of the gauge is changed and the current CP is "2", the CP grant status can be notified by changing the display mode of the two gauges. Further, if the current CP is "5" or more, the display mode of the five gauges changes, and the current CP is "5" to "9" or "10" to "14". It is possible to suggest the CP granting status by changing the display mode (lighting, blinking, color change, etc.) depending on whether the display mode is "15" to "19" or the like. .. Further, in the grant status notification, the result of the initial CP grant lottery may not be taken into consideration, and only the result of the normal CP grant lottery may be notified or suggested, and the result of the initial CP grant lottery may also be all. It may be notified or suggested by adding it, or it may be notified or suggested by adding a part of the result of the initial CP grant lottery (for example, only 1/2 of the given value is notified). You may do it.

Further, in the final state of CZ2, in the grant status notification, it is reported that the current CP grant status is 4 points or less, but there is a CP grant value that has not been notified, and when that is taken into consideration, the CP is 5. In the case of points or more, even if the result of the CP grant lottery in the final state of CZ2 is that CP is not granted, it is notified as if CP was granted in the final state of CZ2 and the score was 5 points or more. It may be done. Of course, if it is notified that the current CP grant status is 4 points or less, and the actual CP grant status is also 4 points or less, the CP will be 5 points or more depending on the result of the CP grant lottery in the final state of CZ2. In that case, the same notification may be performed.

<CZ2 middle navigation lottery>
As described above, the CZ2 middle navigation lottery is performed in each game in the CZ2 normal state, and when the "push order bell" described later is won, the stop operation information (correct answer push) that is advantageous for displaying the "bell" is performed. Information indicating all or part of the order) is determined. The determination is made by determining the navigation state described later in the lottery. Further, when the "common bell" described later is won, the same notification is performed according to the navigation state described later.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the CZ2 normal state, the navigation states are the navigation state 0, which is the non-navigation state, the navigation state 1, which is the 4-choice navigation state, the navigation state 2, which is the 2-choice navigation state, and the all navigation state. , Navigation state 3 in which all navigation can occur once (all navigation state 4 in which all navigation can occur twice, all navigation state 5 in which all navigation can occur three times, and so on. The number at the end is added according to the number of navigations)) is set.

Here, in the second gaming machine, the "pushing order bell" is configured as 6 choices (1st stop operation 3 choices x 2nd stop operation 2 choices x 3rd stop operation 1 choice), and "4 choice navigation". "" Means that a navigation system in which the first stop operation is two choices and the second stop operation is two choices occurs. For example, when the correct answer pressing order is "left middle right (123)" and a 4-choice navigation occurs, "left or middle" or "left" including the correct answer "left" before the first stop operation. A notification prompting one of the stop operations (that is, two choices) is performed, and the stop operation information is not notified (that is, two choices) before the second stop operation. It is supposed to be done. In other words, in terms of probability, the possibility of answering the correct answer by yourself in the order of pressing the correct answer is 1/6 in the non-navigation state, but it is advantageous in that it improves to 1/4 (by following the navigation) in the 4-choice navigation state. Will be.

Further, the "two-choice navigation" indicates that a navigation in which the second stop operation is two-choice occurs. For example, when the correct answer pressing order is "left middle right (123)" and a two-choice navigation occurs, the stop operation indicating that "left" is the correct answer pressing order before the first stop operation. The navigation is such that the information is notified and the information of the stop operation is not notified (that is, two choices) before the second stop operation. That is, in terms of probability, it is advantageous in that the possibility of answering the correct answer by oneself in the order of pressing the correct answer is improved to 1/2 in the two-choice navigation state (by following the navigation). Further, "all navigation" indicates that a navigation that notifies all of the correct answer pressing order is generated. For example, when the correct answer pressing order is "left middle right (123)" and all navigation occurs, stop operation information indicating that "left" is the correct answer pressing order before the first stop operation. Is notified, and before the second stop operation, navigation is executed such that information on the stop operation indicating that "middle" is the correct answer pressing order is notified. That is, in terms of probability, it is advantageous in that the possibility of answering the correct answer by oneself in the order of pressing the correct answer is improved to 1/1 in the all navigation state (by following the navigation).

Then, in the CZ2 normal state, for example, referring to each CZ2 middle navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 42, the current navigation state (“0”, “1”, “≧ 2”) and the internal winning combination (“winning combination”). ”) And determine the result of granting the navigation. For example, in the non-navigation state (navigation state 0), when the internal winning combination of the game becomes "missing", "non-winning" (that is, maintaining the navigation state 0) is determined with a probability of 214/256. Then, "4 choice navigation" (that is, setting the navigation state 1) is determined with a probability of 24/256, and "2-choice navigation" (that is, setting the navigation state 2) is determined with a probability of 12/256. Is determined, and "all navigation 1" (that is, setting the navigation state 3) is determined with a probability of 6/256.

Further, for example, in the 4-choice navigation state (navigation state 1), when the internal winning combination of the game becomes "missing", there is a probability of 214/256 to maintain the "non-winning" (that is, the navigation state 1). ) Is determined, "2-choice navigation" (that is, setting the navigation state 2) is determined with a probability of 24/256, and "all navigation 1" (that is, navigation state 3 is set) with a probability of 12/256. (To set) is determined, and "all 3 navigations" (that is, to set the navigation state 5) is determined with a probability of 6/256.

If the navigation state 1 (4 choice navigation state) is set and the "push order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the 4 choice navigation is executed and finally. When "bell" is displayed, the navigation state 1 is maintained, while when "bell" is not finally displayed, the navigation state 1 ends and the navigation state 0 (navigation) is displayed. None state) is set.

In addition, when the navigation state 2 (2-choice navigation state) is set and the "push order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the 2-choice navigation is executed and finally. When "bell" is displayed, the navigation state 2 is maintained, while when "bell" is not finally displayed, the navigation state 2 ends and the navigation state 0 (navigation). None state) is set. However, if the "bell" is not finally displayed when the navigation state 2 is set, the navigation state is dropped by one (the navigation state is subtracted by 1 and the navigation state is shifted to the navigation state 1). You can also do it.

In addition, when the navigation state 3 (1 navigation count in all navigation states) is set and the "push order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, all navigation is executed. And, regardless of whether or not the "bell" is finally displayed, when all the navigation is executed once, the navigation state is subtracted by 1 and the navigation state is shifted to the navigation state 2 (that is, one navigation state is changed). Fall down). However, if all navigation is executed while the navigation state 3 is set, the navigation state 3 can be terminated and the navigation state 0 (no navigation state) can be set.

In addition, when the navigation state 4 (total number of navigations is 2 in all navigation states) is set and the "push order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, all navigation is executed. And, regardless of whether or not the "bell" is finally displayed, when all the navigation is executed once, the navigation state is subtracted by 1 and the navigation state is shifted to the navigation state 3 (that is, one navigation state is changed). Fall down). The same applies to the case of navigation state 5 or higher. As a result, for example, in the navigation state 3, the execution of all navigation is guaranteed once, in the navigation state 4, the execution of all navigation is guaranteed twice, and in the navigation state 5, the execution of all navigation is guaranteed three times. .. However, when the navigation state 4 or higher is set and all the navigations corresponding to the number of times are executed, the navigation state is terminated and the navigation state 0 (no navigation state) is set. You can also do it.

Further, each navigation state is configured so as not to fall after being set until at least the "pushing order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, for example, once the navigation state 1 is set, the navigation state 1 is maintained until the 4-choice navigation is executed at least once (however, when the navigation state is increased by the CZ2 middle navigation lottery). This is not the case).

The mode of the CZ2 middle navigation lottery is not limited to the above. For example, in a game in which the "push order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, whether or not to execute the navigation, and if it is executed, which navigation is executed is determined. May be good. Further, for example, as in the case of the all-navigation state lottery in the AT state described later, the number of games in which 4-choice navigation can occur, the number of games in which 2-choice navigation can occur, and the number of games in which all navigation can occur are set as the number of games. It is managed by the number, and in the CZ2 middle navigation lottery, such a lottery for granting the number of games and the number of sets may be performed.

<CZ2 reward lottery>
As described above, the CZ2 reward lottery is performed when the final cumulative value of CP in the CZ2 state is 5 points or more in the CZ2 final state, and the type of the pseudo bonus state to be transferred is determined. To. The CZ2 reward lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the CZ2 reward lottery table shown in FIG. 42, and the type of the pseudo bonus state is determined with a probability according to the cumulative value of CP (cumulative CP).

For example, when the cumulative CP is "5", it is determined that the pseudo bonus state of the migration destination is "RB state" with a probability of 244/256, and the pseudo bonus state of the migration destination is "RB state" with a probability of 8/256. It is determined that the "weak BB state" will be established, and the pseudo-bonus state of the migration destination will be determined to be the "strong BB state" with a probability of 4/256.

Further, for example, when the cumulative CP is "8", it is determined that the pseudo bonus state of the migration destination becomes the "weak BB state" with a probability of 232/256, and the pseudo bonus of the migration destination is determined with a probability of 24/256. It is determined that the state becomes a "strong BB state". Further, for example, when the cumulative CP is "10" to "14", it is determined that the pseudo bonus state of the migration destination becomes the "strong BB state" with a probability of 254/256, and the transition is made with a probability of 2/256. It is determined that the previous pseudo-bonus state becomes the "freeze BB state".

Here, the pseudo-bonus state in the second gaming machine will be described. The second gaming machine is roughly classified into an RB state and a BB state as pseudo bonus states. The BB state includes a "weak BB state", a "strong BB state", and a "freeze BB state". Both the RB state and the BB state are configured as a gaming state that continues for 21 games (the game period is set to 21 games), but in the RB state, the "pushing order bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination. In the game that was played, the correct push order is not always notified (including the case where only a part is notified), whereas in the BB state, the "push order bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination. In the game, the correct answer push order is always notified (or at least the correct answer push order may be notified with a higher probability than the RB state), which is more advantageous for the player than the RB state. It is in a game state.

Further, although details are omitted, the strong BB state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the weak BB state, and the freeze BB state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the strong BB state. That is, the degree of advantage of the player is configured such that the freeze BB state is high, the strong BB state is medium, and the weak BB state is low. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the method for varying the degree of advantage of the player in each BB state. For example, the higher the degree of advantage, the longer the game period can be set, or the higher the degree of advantage, the higher the probability that all navigation will occur. Further, since the second gaming machine always shifts to the AT state after the end of the BB state, the AT state is easily extended in various lottery described later in the AT state, and the AT state is extended. When the probability of passing through the BB state increases, the probability of all navigation occurring in the AT state increases, and other advantageous conditions can be set as appropriate. Further, in the case where it is simply explained that "it is determined to shift to the BB state" in the second gaming machine, any one of the above-mentioned types of the BB state is in accordance with a predetermined condition. It shall be decided.

Further, in the second gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 58 described later, in the weak BB state, a reel effect (for example, a lock-in-red 7 alignment effect) in which the “red 7” symbol alignment is stopped and displayed is executed. The strong BB state and the freeze BB state are started after the reel effect (for example, the lock medium blue 7 alignment effect) in which the "blue 7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed is executed. It has become a thing. Therefore, from this point of view, between the red 7BB state (weak BB state) started with red 7 alignment and the blue 7BB state (strong BB state and freeze BB state) started with blue 7 alignment. The degree of advantage may be different. In this case, in addition to the above-mentioned method, for example, in the red 7BB state, only one execution right of the AT state is granted (that is, the AT state is changed to the AT state after the end, but the AT state is extended? Whether or not it depends on the result of the subsequent game), whereas in the blue 7BB state, a plurality of execution rights of the AT state are granted (that is, after the end, the game shifts to the AT state, and the AT state is also concerned. It is determined that at least one set will be extended) so that the blue 7BB state has a higher degree of advantage than the red 7BB state.

Further, as for the execution right of the AT state given by the blue 7BB state, for example, if the execution right of the AT state given by the red 7BB state is one, at least two or more may be given, and the number of grants thereof. The determination method can also be set as appropriate. For example, in the blue 7BB state, a predetermined number of grants (for example, two) of AT state execution rights may be granted, or the grant lottery (for example, the number of grants "2" to "11" may be granted. ”) Is performed, and the right to execute the AT state of the number granted according to the lottery result may be granted. Further, the grant lottery is also performed in the red 7BB state (in this case, for example, one of "1" to "11" is determined as the number of grants), and the grant lottery is performed more than the grant lottery in the red 7BB state. The given lottery in the blue 7BB state may be made easier to obtain a more advantageous lottery result, and the degree of advantage between the two may be different. Further, by causing a similar difference between the strong BB state and the freeze BB, the degree of advantage between the two may be different. In short, when the BB state starts, when the red 7 is aligned, the expectation that the AT state is extended is relatively low, and when the blue 7 is aligned, it is higher than when the red 7 is aligned. The expectation that the AT state will be extended is relatively high. Further, when a long freeze occurs when the blue 7 is aligned, the expectation that the AT state is extended can be relatively higher than when the long freeze does not occur.

Then, in the CZ2 reward lottery, as described above, the larger the cumulative value of the CP given in the CZ2 state, the easier it is to determine the pseudo-bonus state that is more advantageous for the player.

As described above, in the CZ2 state, for example, the CP grant lottery and the CZ2 middle navigation lottery are performed in the CZ2 normal state, and the CP grant lottery, the CZ2 reward lottery, and the normal medium state transition lottery are performed in the CZ2 final state. However, these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed. Further, it is possible to shift from the BB state or the AT state to the CZ2 state, and in the CZ2 state, the right to extend the BB state or the AT state can be granted (the CZ2 state). After the end of, it returns to the original state).

In addition, the CZ2 state is a gaming state in which the CZ2 reward lottery is performed, so that there is a high expectation that the player will shift to the pseudo-bonus state than in the normal state, and information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Is. Therefore, it can be said that it is a gaming state configured as the above-mentioned "increased section", but considering the frequency of execution of navigation, the possibility that medals will increase is not necessarily high. It is a gaming state that constitutes the "directing section" or "normally advantageous section" of. However, it is possible to adjust the frequency at which navigation is executed to configure the overall configuration of the CZ2 state as an "increasing section".

As described above, when the CZ2 state is started, the CZ2 normal state is set, and in the CZ2 normal state, a CP grant lottery (initial CP grant lottery at the start of the CZ2 state, normal CP grant lottery in the CZ2 state) is performed. Further, when the CZ2 middle navigation lottery is won, one of the navigation execution rights (navigation state) is granted, and information on the stop operation according to the granted navigation execution right is notified. As a result, the result of the CP grant lottery also changes. In the normal state of CZ2, when the number of times that the "bell" cannot be displayed even though the "pushing order bell" described later is won is 7, the final state of CZ2 is reached. In the final state of CZ2, if CP is finally obtained by 5 points or more, CZ is successful, the type of pseudo-bonus state to be transferred is determined by the CZ2 reward lottery, and the pseudo-bonus state of the determined type is transferred. .. In this case, if it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus state after passing through the precursor state, the transition to the corresponding precursor state is performed. On the other hand, in the final state of CZ2, if CP is not finally obtained by 5 points or more, CZ fails and the state shifts to the normal state.

<Example of game flow in CZ2 state>
Subsequently, an example of the flow of the game in the CZ2 state will be described with reference to FIG. 40. 40 (a) is an example of a case where CZ fails in the CZ2 state, and FIGS. 40 (b) to (d) are examples of a case where CZ succeeds in the CZ2 state.

In addition, in FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (d), the "game number elapsed" indicates the pure game number elapsed, and the "remaining game number" stays in the CZ2 state due to the increase in the number of bell spills. The "winning combination" indicates that the number of possible games is reduced, the "winning combination" indicates the internal winning combination determined in the corresponding game, and the "display result" indicates the player's stop operation. The finally displayed stop display mode (symbol combination) is shown, "CP" shows the cumulative value of CP, and the game state is that the corresponding game is in the CZ2 normal state and the CZ2 final state. It indicates which of the game states is in the game.

In (a) of FIG. 40, it is assumed that CP "2" is first assigned by the initial CP grant lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" was won, but the "bell" was not displayed (the bell was spilled), and the number of remaining games is decreasing. The same applies to the third game (3G), the sixth game (6G), the seventh game (7G), the ninth game (9G), the tenth game (10G), and the eleventh game (11G). Further, in the fifth game (5G), since the "bell" was displayed by winning the "pushing order bell", it is assumed that the CP "1" was given by the normal CP grant lottery. Further, in the 8th game (8G), since the "bell" is displayed by winning the "common bell", it is assumed that the CP "1" is normally assigned by the CP grant lottery.

Although not shown in FIG. 40 (a) (the same applies to the following (b) to (d) unless otherwise specified), the game that wins the "push order bell" or "common bell". Then, one of the four-choice navigation, the two-choice navigation, and the all navigation may be executed, and none of them may be executed.

In (a) of FIG. 40, "2" is given as the initial value of CP, but in the normal state of CZ2, CP is "1" in each of the 5th game (5G) and the 8th game (8G) in the normal state of CZ2. It was only granted, and in the 11th game (11G), the number of bell spills became 7 times and the game moved to the CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), and CP was not granted even in the CZ2 final state. Since the final CP is "4", the CZ2 reward lottery is not performed (it does not shift to the pseudo bonus state), and the CZ fails.

In FIG. 40 (b), it is assumed that CP "2" is first assigned by the initial CP grant lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" was won, but the "bell" was not displayed (the bell was spilled), and the number of remaining games is decreasing. The same applies to the third game (3G), the sixth game (6G), the seventh game (7G), the ninth game (9G), the tenth game (10G), and the eleventh game (11G). Further, in the fourth game (4G), since the "bell" was displayed by winning the "pushing order bell", it is assumed that the CP "1" was given by the normal CP grant lottery. The same applies to the fifth game (5G). Further, in the 8th game (8G), since the "bell" is displayed by winning the "common bell", it is assumed that the CP "1" is normally assigned by the CP grant lottery.

Then, in (b) of FIG. 40, "2" is given as the initial value of CP, and in the normal state of CZ2, CP is given in the 4th game (4G), the 5th game (5G), and the 8th game (8G), respectively. Is given by "1", and the number of bell spills becomes 7 times in the 11th game (11G), and the game shifts to the CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), and CP is not given in the CZ2 final state. However, since the final CP is "5", the CZ2 reward lottery will be performed (it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus state), and the CZ is successful.

In (c) of FIG. 40, it is assumed that CP is not given by the initial CP grant lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" was won, but the "bell" was not displayed (the bell was spilled), and the number of remaining games is decreasing. The same applies to the third game (3G), the sixth game (6G), the seventh game (7G), the ninth game (9G), the tenth game (10G), and the eleventh game (11G). Further, in the fifth game (5G), since the "bell" was displayed by winning the "pushing order bell", it is assumed that the CP "1" was given by the normal CP grant lottery. Further, in the 8th game (8G), since the "bell" is displayed by winning the "common bell", it is assumed that the CP "1" is normally assigned by the CP grant lottery.

Then, in (c) of FIG. 40, the initial value of CP is not given, and in the normal state of CZ2, CP is given "1" in each of the 5th game (5G) and the 8th game (8G). In the 11th game (11G), the number of bell spills became 7 and the game moved to the final state of CZ2 (12th game (12G)), and the CP so far was "2". Since the CP was given "5" by winning the "watermelon" in the final state of CZ2, the final CP became "7", so the CZ2 reward lottery is performed (shifting to the pseudo bonus state). Will be decided), and CZ has been successful.

In FIG. 40 (d), it is assumed that CP "5" is first assigned by the initial CP grant lottery. That is, at this point, it is confirmed that the CZ will be successful, but the CZ2 state will not end immediately. Further, in FIG. 40 (d), in the first game (1G), by winning the "watermelon", it is assumed that the "all navigation 3" was won by the CZ2 middle navigation lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" is won, all navigation is executed (all navigation is reduced to the remaining two), "bell" is displayed, and the CP "1" is displayed by the normal CP grant lottery. "Is assumed to have been given. Also, in the third game (3G), the "push order bell" is won, all navigation is executed (all navigation is reduced to the remaining one), "bell" is displayed, and the CP "1" is displayed by the normal CP grant lottery. "Is assumed to have been given.

Further, in the fourth game (4G), it is assumed that the "strong bell" is won and the CP "1" is given by the normal CP grant lottery. In addition, here as well, the CZ2 middle navigation lottery is performed by winning the "strong bell", and for example, it is assumed that the lottery wins "all navigation 1" (all navigation increases to the remaining 2). Also, in the 5th game (5G), the "push order bell" is won, all navigation is executed (all navigation is reduced to the remaining one), "bell" is displayed, and the CP "1" is displayed by the normal CP grant lottery. "Is assumed to have been given. Also, in the 6th game (6G), the "push order bell" is won, all navigation is executed (all navigation is reduced to 0 remaining), "bell" is displayed, and the CP "1" is displayed by the normal CP grant lottery. "Is assumed to have been given. The cumulative value of CP up to this point is "10".

Then, in FIG. 40 (d), in the seventh game (7G), it is assumed that the "fixed combination" is won and the CP "10" is given by the normal CP grant lottery. In the second gaming machine, when the cumulative value of CP becomes "20" or more in the CZ2 normal state, the CZ2 state is exceptionally terminated in the game even if the number of remaining games remains. The "freeze BB state" having the highest degree of advantage is determined as the type of pseudo-bonus state, and the freeze BB state is started from the next game.

<Amusement machine using the playability of the CZ2 state>
In the second gaming machine, for example, by using the gaming property in the CZ2 state described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

For example, a pseudo-bonus state (for example, an RB state or a BB state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and a CZ2 state in which the expectation that the transition condition of the pseudo-bonus state is satisfied is higher than the normal state. The specified end condition of the CZ2 state is that the number of times the "bell" is not displayed (the number of times the bell is spilled) reaches 7 times in the game in which the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination. Is.

The number of bell spills, which is the specified end condition, is not limited to 7 times and can be set as appropriate. Further, even if a combination other than the "pushing order bell" (for example, "watermelon", "cherry", etc.) is missed, the number of times may be counted.

Also, for example, in a game in which the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the "bell" is displayed, but the incorrect answering is different from the correct answer pressing order. When the stop operation is performed in order, a symbol combination different from the "bell" is displayed, and when the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination in the CZ2 state, it is advantageous for displaying the "bell". It is a gaming machine that can notify information on stop operations (for example, 4-choice navigation, 2-choice navigation, and all navigation).

The "pushing order bell" is composed of 6 choices, but may be configured with 3 choices (only the type of the first stop operation), 12 choices or 24 choices (other than the push order). In addition, the timing of the stop operation (pressing position) may also be configured by providing a correct answer position and an incorrect position). In the latter case, some navigations notify the correct push order as the push order, but the push position (the position of the mark such as red 7, blue 7 or black BAR (that is, the type of the specific symbol to be aimed at)). ) Can be configured as a navigation that does not notify.

Further, although the target combination of the specified end condition is a small combination "push order bell", this can also be configured as a "push order replay" which is a replay combination. In this case, for example, "Bell replay" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in the correct answer pressing order, while "Bell replay" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in the incorrect answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order. It can be configured to display a symbol combination different from "" (for example, "normal replay").

In addition, for example, when the "pushing order bell" informs the information of the stop operation which is advantageous for displaying the "bell" in the game determined as the internal winning combination, the "all navigation" in which all the correct answer pressing orders are notified. This is a gaming machine that may perform "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation" as a partial navigation that informs a part of the correct answer pressing order.

Further, for example, when determining the notification mode of the navigation to be executed, a state in which the partial navigation can be performed when the "bell" is displayed in the game in which the partial navigation is performed (for example, the navigation state). It is a gaming machine that continues 1 and the navigation state 2), and ends the state in which the partial navigation can be performed when the "bell" is not displayed.

The end condition for terminating the state in which some navigation can be performed is not limited to this. For example, it may continue for the number of guaranteed games, and the end condition may be that the number of guaranteed games has been exhausted. In addition, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination related to the "bell" is decided, each game and continuous lottery (end lottery) are performed, and if the continuation is decided, the continuation is continued, and if the end is decided. Can also be an end condition. Further, these termination conditions may be used either of them or may be used in combination.

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine that can determine a "common bell" that allows the "bell" to be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation as an internal winning combination.

Further, for example, when "bell" is displayed, it is a gaming machine that can be given "CP", which is a privilege that contributes to the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine capable of giving "CP" according to the start of the CZ2 state.

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine that can be given a "CP" even when a "determined combination" in which the "bell" cannot be displayed is determined as an internal winning combination.

The conditions for granting "CP" are not limited to this. For example, the CP grant lottery (for example, the same as the normal CP grant lottery) is performed even in the CZ2 precursor state, and when shifting from the CZ2 precursor state to the CZ2 state (CZ2 normal state), the CP grant lottery is given in the CZ2 precursor state. It is also possible to make the "CP" take over to the CZ2 state. Further, for example, even in the CZ2 normal state, when a rare role other than the "fixed combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, a CP granting lottery different from the normal CP granting lottery (for example, the same as the special CP granting lottery) is performed. You can also make it happen. Further, in the CZ2 state, a freeze occurrence lottery is performed, and when the freeze occurrence lottery is won and the freeze is executed, a predetermined value (for example, 5 points) of "CP" may be given. can. That is, if a predetermined condition is satisfied according to some game result, the "CP" may be given with a predetermined probability.

Further, for example, in the CZ2 state, when the granting status of "CP" becomes 5 points or more, which is a predetermined status, the gaming machine is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state.

The number of points of "CP" at which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. Further, when the CZ2 state is started, the number of points may be determined by lottery so that the number of points fluctuates.

Further, for example, the CZ2 state is configured to be able to continue until the specified end condition is satisfied even after the "CP" grant status becomes the predetermined state, and when the specified end condition is satisfied, the "CP" state is set. It is configured to shift to the pseudo-bonus state when the grant status is in the predetermined status, and it is possible to grant "CP" even after the grant status of "CP" is in the predetermined status. , There are multiple types (for example, RB and BB) with different advantages, and when the specified termination conditions are met, the number of "CP" grants is higher, and the pseudo-bonus state with higher advantages is achieved. It is a gaming machine that is easy to migrate.

Further, for example, in the CZ2 state, if the specified end condition is satisfied before the “CP” grant status becomes the predetermined status, whether or not at least the “CP” grant status becomes the predetermined status in the CZ2 final state is determined. It is a decidable gaming machine.

It should be noted that the condition for determining the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not limited to this even if the specified end condition is satisfied before the “CP” grant status becomes the predetermined status. For example, when the CZ2 final state ends with the cumulative value of "CP" being "0" in the CZ2 state, it may be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus state.

(RB state)
Subsequently, the RB state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 39. As described above, the RB state is configured as a gaming state of an advantageous section and is a gaming state configured as the above-mentioned "increasing section", which is 21 games per set.

In the start game in the RB state, a reel effect in which the "white BAR" symbol alignment is displayed according to the start operation (the reel for RB having the lock number "6" shown in FIG. 58 described later). After the "action 1" or the "RB reel action 2" with the lock number "7" is performed), the game in the RB state is started.

In the RB state, for example, a BB promotion lottery and an RB middle navigation lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed.

<BB promotion lottery>
In the RB state, a BB promotion lottery is performed to determine whether or not to promote each game or pseudo-bonus state to the BB state (more specifically, whether to shift from the RB state to the BB state). In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, the later-described "special" or weak rare role (described later "cherry"). "Or" watermelon "), it is decided to move to the BB state with a low probability, and when it wins a strong rare role ("chance eye "or" strong bell "described later), it will move to the BB state with a medium probability. It is decided to shift to the BB state with 100% (or high probability) when the winning combination (“determined combination” described later) is won.

Here, in the RB state, when the BB promotion lottery is won and the next game shifts to the BB state, the game period in the BB state is started from the beginning. For example, if it is decided to shift to the BB state in the 11th game after 10 games have been digested in the RB state, the next game will be the 1st game instead of the 12th game in the BB state (that is, the RB state). And the number of games in the set is not inherited in the BB state). Not limited to this, the number of games in the set can be inherited in the RB state and the BB state. That is, for example, if it is determined to shift to the BB state in the 11th game after 10 games have been digested in the RB state, the next game may be configured to be the 12th game in the BB state.

<RB middle navigation lottery>
In the RB state, in the game in which the "pushing order bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination,
The RB middle navigation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation (information indicating all or part of the correct answer pressing order) which is advantageous for displaying the "bell". In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, in the navigation lottery table during AT (see FIG. 45 described later) AP is "less than 80" and the same probability as when the "push order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination (may be different, but the "increasing interval" is maintained. The type of navigation to be executed is determined by (probability).

As described above, the RB state is a game state that constitutes an "increasing section" in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, but the game that wins the "push order bell" does not necessarily have "all navigation". It is configured as a gaming state that may not occur. In addition, although "all navigation" always occurs, by configuring it as a game state in which the game period is shorter than the BB state (the number of games per set is small), a difference from the BB state can be obtained. It is also possible, and the BB state is a gaming state that can be extended, but the RB state can be configured as a gaming state that cannot be extended so that there is a difference from the BB state.

As described above, in the RB state, if it is determined to shift to the BB state before the end of the RB state, the state shifts to the BB state (BB promotion), and the RB state does not shift to the BB state. If the game ends after 21 games have been exhausted, the RB ends, the advantageous section also ends, and the game shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section (RB end).

In the RB state, the number of medals expected by the player or planned by the design may not be paid out due to the bias in the generation status of the navigation system. Therefore, when the number of medals paid out in the RB state is equal to or less than a specific amount (threshold value) and the RB state ends, it is exceptionally determined to shift to the BB state. Further, the specific amount can be arbitrarily set, but as an example, it is set to "0 sheets". Further, as another example, "21" ("42" if 2 or less) indicating that the net increase in the number of cards in the RB state was 1 or less per game has the same purpose. It is possible to rescue the player and suppress the decline in interest.

(BB state)
Subsequently, the BB state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 39, and 43. As described above, the BB state is configured as a gaming state of an advantageous section and is a gaming state configured as the above-mentioned "increasing section", which is 21 games per set.

In the start game in the BB state, a reel effect in which the “red 7” symbol alignment is displayed according to the start operation (for weak BB with the lock number “9” shown in FIG. 58 described later). "Reel action") or "Blue 7" symbol alignment is displayed (see "Reel action 2 for strong BB" with lock number "11" shown in FIG. 58 below), and then the BB The game of the state is to be started.

In the BB state, for example, an initial AP lottery and a special AT lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed.

<Initial AP lottery>
In the second gaming machine, in the AT state, the point "AP" is used as information that contributes to the determination of whether or not to extend the AT state (in other words, information for changing the degree of advantage in the AT state). It is possible to grant. Further, even in the BB state in which the AT state is stayed prior to the start of the AT state, the initial value of "AP" can be given. The initial AP lottery includes a so-called initial AP mode lottery performed at the time of the first hit and an initial AP grant lottery performed every time the BB state is changed to the AT state.

The first AP mode lottery is, for example, when the first BB state transitioned from the precursor state, CZ state, or RB state (excluding the case of transitioning from the judge state to the BB state as a result of the extension of the AT state) is started. (For example, at the start game of the BB state or when shifting to the BB state), it is performed to determine the AP mode for varying the degree of advantage of the initial AP grant lottery described later. The AP mode once determined is maintained in the judge state until the advantageous section ends without extension. That is, the AP mode constitutes one of the information for determining the degree of advantage of "AP" grant in a series of advantageous states composed of the BB state and the AT state (including the judge state).

The first AP mode lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the first AP mode lottery table shown in FIG. 43, and the AP mode of any one of "mode 1" to "mode 9" is performed with a probability according to the current advantageous section mode. Is to be decided.

Here, the advantageous section mode will be described. The advantageous section mode is information determined as one of the lottery elements of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery when transitioning from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. It is configured as information for changing the degree of advantage (particularly, the degree of advantage in the AT state) of the advantageous section until the transition to the advantageous section. In the second gaming machine, as an example, three types of modes, advantageous section mode A, advantageous section mode B, and advantageous section mode C, are provided, and in the advantageous section transition lottery, any of them will be performed with a predetermined probability. That mode is set. Which mode is advantageous depends on each lottery (see FIGS. 43 to 46 described later), but the relatively advantageous section mode A seems to be the most advantageous mode. (This is not limited to the drawn lottery value shown. Which lottery and which advantageous section mode is advantageous can be changed as appropriate).

Subsequently, the AP mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in each AP mode, information (“1” to “4”) of the lottery pattern in the initial AP grant lottery is associated with each AT set number. As will be described later, in the initial AP grant lottery, the lottery pattern "4" is the most advantageous, the lottery pattern "3" is the next most advantageous, and the lottery pattern "2" is the lottery pattern "2". Although it is more disadvantageous than the case of "3", it is more advantageous than the case of the lottery pattern "1", and the case of the lottery pattern "1" is the most disadvantageous. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player that each AP mode is associated with a more advantageous lottery pattern.

For example, in "AP mode 1", the lottery pattern "3" is associated with the "fifth set", but the lottery pattern "1" is associated with the number of other AT sets, so that the AT state is changed. If it is decided to continue 4 sets and extend the AT state via the BB state in the judge state after the end of the 4th set, the initial lottery pattern "3" is used (the next time is the 5th set). The AP grant lottery can be received, but in other cases, only the initial AP grant lottery according to the lottery pattern "1" can be received. In addition, when the BB state is first changed to the AT state (first set), the initial AP grant lottery can always be received, but here, too, the initial AP grant by the lottery pattern "1" is given. Only lottery can be received.

On the other hand, for example, in "AP mode 9", there is no AT set number associated with the lottery pattern "1", and since the lottery pattern "3" is associated with the odd-numbered set, a plurality of AT states are set. If it is decided to continue and extend the AT state via the BB state in the judge state after the end of the even set, the initial AP grant lottery by the lottery pattern "3" (the next time is the odd set) You can receive it. In addition, when the BB state is first changed to the AT state (first set), the initial AP grant lottery can always be received, but here, too, the initial AP grant by the lottery pattern "3" is given. You can receive lottery.

Further, focusing on the number of AT sets, in each AP mode, the lottery pattern of the odd-numbered set is relatively advantageous in many cases. Therefore, when the AT state is continuous, if the odd-numbered set can be extended including the BB state, the expectation that the AT state can be further extended (by assigning the initial value of AP) is increased. In this way, by causing undulations in the addition of the initial value of AP, it is possible to create a state in which the player's expectation of continuing the AT state is further increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. From this point of view, the number of AT sets that are relatively advantageous is not necessarily limited to odd-numbered sets. For example, the first set (or the number of AT sets in the first half) is advantageous because the lottery patterns "3" and "4" are associated (or there are many associations), but the second and subsequent sets (or the ATs in the latter half) are associated with each other. The number of sets) may be such that the lottery patterns “3” and “4” are less (or not) associated with each other so that at least two or more AT states can be easily continued. Further, for example, the number of AT sets in the latter half is advantageous because the lottery patterns "3" and "4" are often associated with each other, but the number of AT sets in the first half is associated with the lottery patterns "3" and "4". The number may be reduced so that it becomes easier to continue at least after the AT state continues for a certain set.

The initial AP grant lottery refers to the AP mode determined as described above, and when the BB state ends (for example, when the final game of the BB state or the transition to the AT state), the end of the BB state. It is performed to determine the initial value of "AP" in the AT state to be transferred later.

The initial AP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the initial AP grant lottery table shown in FIG. 43, and the AP is based on a lottery pattern according to the current number of AT sets associated with the set AP mode. As the initial value (initial AP) of, "0" (that is, no initial AP is given), "20", or "40" is determined. The initial AP is not limited to this, and for example, "80" in which the extension of the AT state is determined can be determined with a predetermined probability.

<Special AT lottery>
In the second gaming machine, when it is decided to extend the AT state in the AT state, the extended AT state is a special AT state in which "all navigation" always occurs in one set of 30 games (in other words, in other words). For example, the game period is defined as 30 games, and it may be in a pseudo-bonus state (special BB state) in which "all navigation" always occurs). After the end of the special AT state, it always shifts to the normal AT state of the next set (the extension of the AT state is confirmed). In addition, in the subsequent judge state, the lottery result of the navigation lottery during the judge, which will be described later, is given one step preferential treatment (for example, when "no navigation" is determined, this is given one step preferential treatment and becomes "4 choice navigation". If "4 choice navigation" is decided, this will be given one step preferential treatment and become "2-choice navigation", and if "2-choice navigation" is decided, this will be given one step preferential treatment and become "all navigation") It has become like.

Then, in the AT state (and the judge state) immediately before it is decided whether or not to shift to the special AT state, a special character that does not normally appear appears because it suggests that if it is extended, it shifts to the special AT state. The special character production to be done is to be executed.

Then, in the special AT lottery, in a series of advantageous states composed of the BB state and the AT state (including the judge state), whether to shift to the AT state (that is, the special AT state) in which the above-mentioned special character effect is executed. Whether or not the AT state (AT state that can be determined) appears (invokes), and if it appears (activates), the set of AT states is determined. ing. Similar to the above-mentioned first AP mode lottery, these lottery (invocation lottery and activation set lottery) are performed at the so-called first hit.

The activation lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the activation lottery table shown in FIG. 43, and is activated (“winning”) or not activated (“non-winning”) with a probability according to the current advantageous section mode. Is determined. As a result of the activation lottery, if it is decided to activate, the activation set lottery will be performed.

The activation set lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the activation set lottery table shown in FIG. 43, and the number of sets to activate (the number of AT sets) is determined. Then, for example, when it is decided to activate in the 4th set and the AT state can be extended to the 4th set, the AT state becomes the AT state in which the above-mentioned special character effect is executed, and further. When it is determined that the AT state is extended in the judge state after the AT state is digested, it becomes possible to shift to the special AT state.

As described above, in the BB state, when the BB state ends by digesting 21 games, the state shifts to the AT state (BB end). In addition, although the second gaming machine is supposed to always shift to the AT state after the end of the BB state, it can be configured so that the transition to the AT state may not occur. Further, although it is assumed that the game period in the BB state does not change, for example, an extended lottery or the like is performed during the BB state, and if this is won, the number of games in the BB state can be extended. However, it can be regarded as one set of 21 games, and the BB state can be extended in units of the number of sets.

(AT state and judge state)
Subsequently, the AT state and the judge state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 39, 41 and 44 to 46. As described above, the AT state is configured as a gaming state of an advantageous section and is a gaming state configured as the above-mentioned "increasing section", which is 30 games per set. Further, the judge state is a gaming state in which it can be determined whether or not to extend the AT state.

In the AT state, for example, promotion state lottery, AT state lottery, AP grant lottery, Lv. 5 Promotion lottery, all navigation status lottery, and AT mid-navigation lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed.

Further, in the judge state, for example, a lottery for navigation during the judge, a lottery for the judge reward, a lottery for the final revival of the judge, and a lottery for all navigation states are performed. It should be noted that these lottery is an example, and the lottery other than these can be configured to be performed, or any of these lottery can be configured not to be performed.

The basic playability of the AT state and the judge state is as follows.
(1) First, when the set in the AT state is started, whether the promotion lottery (Lv.5 promotion lottery) in the set is given preferential treatment (whether the promotion high probability state is given) or not. (Whether it is in the promotion normal state) is determined according to the lottery result of the promotion state lottery. The lottery can be performed at the same timing as the above-mentioned initial AP grant lottery.

(2) In addition, when the set in the AT state is started, whether the lottery related to the AP grant in the set is given preferential treatment (whether the AP high probability state is given) or is not given preferential treatment. (Whether the AP normal state is set) is determined according to the lottery result of the AT state lottery. The lottery can be performed at the same timing as the above-mentioned initial AP grant lottery.

(3) Further, in the AT state, the AP grant lottery is performed. The AP grant lottery includes the above-mentioned initial AP grant lottery, the AP grant lottery described later (when the bell is displayed), the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the strong bell is displayed), and the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the self-powered bell is displayed). , The details of the lottery will be described later. In the AT state, AP is basically given when "bell" is displayed, and when the set is completed, if the cumulative value of AP including the initial value of AP is "80" or more, the judge When "Lv.4" is set as the level and the cumulative value of AP is "60" to "79", "Lv.3" is set as the judge level and the cumulative value of AP is "40" to "59". In the case of, "Lv.2" is set as the judge level, and when the cumulative value of AP is "20" to "39", "Lv.1" is set as the judge level and the cumulative value of AP is "0". In the case of "19", "Lv.0" is set as the judge level. The judge level will be described later. Further, when the cumulative value of AP is "80" or more, "Lv.4" is uniformly set as the judge level, and the judge level "Lv.5" is not set according to the cumulative value of AP. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the cumulative value of AP is "80" to "99", "Lv.4" is set as the judge level, and when the cumulative value of AP is "100" or more, the judge level is "Lv." .5 ”may be set.

(4) Further, in the AT state, Lv. 5 Promotion lottery will be held. Lv. 5 Promotion lottery determines whether or not "Lv.5" is set as the judge level (that is, whether or not the judge level is set to the highest level by one-shot lottery) regardless of the current cumulative value of AP. It is a lottery to decide. It should be noted that the lottery can also be configured as a lottery for whether or not to give the AP "100". That is, it can also be configured as one of the AP grant lottery.

(5) In the AT state, a lottery for all navigation states is performed. In the all-navigation state lottery, whether or not to generate a state (all-navigation state) in which "all-navigation" can be executed at the time of winning the "push order bell" in the AT state, and how long if it is generated. It is a lottery to decide whether to do it. As described above, in the AT state, the AP is given when the "bell" is displayed, so that the AP is inevitably likely to be given when the all navigation state occurs. That is, the all navigation state is configured as a state in which medals are easily obtained, and the AT state is configured as a state in which it is easy to be extended. The details of the lottery will be described later.

(6) Further, in the AT state, the navigation lottery during AT is performed. The navigation lottery during AT is a lottery for deciding whether to execute "all navigation" or some navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation") even when the above-mentioned all navigation state is not performed. There is. The details of the lottery will be described later.

(7) In this way, in the AT state, information on the stop operation that is advantageous for displaying the "bell" is notified when the navigation state is in full, and the "bell" is displayed even when the navigation is not in the full navigation state. Information on an advantageous stop operation may be notified, and the AP grant status varies depending on whether or not such information on the stop operation is notified. Of course, even if the player selects the correct answer pressing order by himself and the "bell" is displayed, the AP grant status also changes. Then, in the AT state, when 30 games of the set are digested, the judge level corresponding to the cumulative value of AP is set, and the game shifts to the judge state. If the number of games in all navigation states remains when 30 games in the set are exhausted, the AT state of the set is extended until the number of games in all navigation states becomes 0 (judgment state). Further APs may be added while it is being extended). In addition, Lv. 5 If you win the promotion lottery, "Lv.5" is set as the judge level regardless of the cumulative value of AP.

(8) In the judge state, if the judge level is set to "Lv.4" or "Lv.5", it is confirmed that the AT state is extended. When "Lv.3" is set as the judge level, "Judge count" is set to 3 times, and when "Lv.2" is set as the judge level, "Judge count" is set. "Is set to 2 times, and when" Lv.1 "is set as the judge level, the" number of judges "is set to 1 time. The "number of judges" means the number of times that the decision as to whether or not to extend the AT state is made in the judge state. Also, when "Lv.0" is set as the judge level, the "number of judges" is set to 1, but in this case, the judge level is "Lv.1" in the navigation lottery during the judge described later. The lottery is more disadvantageous than the case, and the degree of advantage is different between the case of "Lv.1" and the case of "Lv.0".

(9) In the judge state, basically, the decision on whether or not to extend is made in the game that wins the "push order bell" described later, and if the "bell" can be displayed in the game, the extension is successful (extension). Is determined), the judge reward lottery is performed, and the mode to be extended (for example, via the "continuation type" described later or the BB state) is determined. In addition, even if you win a rare role including "common bell" and "strong bell" described later, the extension is decided so that the extension will be successful, and the judge reward lottery will be done in the same way and it will be extended. The aspect is determined. In addition, when "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" is set as the judge level, the extension is decided so that the extension is successful for all the roles, and the judge reward lottery is performed in the same manner. , The mode to be extended is determined. That is, in the judge state, the AT state is extended if the result of the decision on whether or not to extend is successful before the judge state ends without extension.

(10) On the other hand, in the judge state, if the game that wins the "pushing order bell" described later makes a decision on whether or not to extend the game, and the "bell" cannot be displayed in the game, the result of the decision on whether or not to extend is possible. Will fail to extend. In this case, the number of judges is subtracted by "1". Then, when the number of judges becomes "0", the game shifts to the final judge state of one game. That is, when the judge level is "Lv.3", the opportunity to decide whether or not to extend is given three times, and when the judge level is "Lv.2", the opportunity to decide whether or not to extend is given twice. When the judge level is "Lv.1" and "Lv.0", the opportunity to decide whether or not to extend is given only once.

(11) Further, in the judge state, whether or not the "bell" can be displayed in the game corresponding to the "pushing order bell" described later varies depending on whether or not the navigation is executed in the game. Therefore, in the judge state, the navigation lottery is performed during the judge. In the Judge Middle Navi lottery, for example, whether or not to execute "All Navi" or some Navi (for example, "4 Choice Navi" or "2 Choice Navi") in the game that wins the "Push Order Bell" described later. It is a lottery to decide. The details of the lottery will be described later.

(12) In the final judge state, the final judge revival lottery is performed. The judge final revival lottery is a lottery in which the mode in which the AT state is extended is determined when a predetermined rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the judge final state. That is, even if all the results of the extension propriety decision in the judge state fail to extend, if the predetermined rare role can be won in the final game, the extension of the AT state is determined (AT state). Will continue to revive). The details of the lottery will be described later.

(13) In addition, when it is decided that the AT state is extended in the judge state (including the final judge state), depending on the type of the reward, all the navigation states (sets) used in the AT state of the next set. All navigation status lottery to determine the number) may be performed. The details of the lottery will be described later.

<Promotion status lottery>
The promotion state lottery is, for example, when the set in the AT state is started (for example, when the start game of the set in the AT state or the transition to the next set in the AT state), the promotion state of the set (for example, when moving to the next set in the AT state). It is done to determine either the promotion normal state or the promotion high probability state).

The promotion state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the promotion state lottery table shown in FIG. 44, and is promoted to either one with a probability according to the current advantageous section mode and the result of the initial AP grant lottery (initial AP). The state is to be determined. The promotion state shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and Lv. 5 It is also possible to provide three or more types of promotion states as promotion states in which at least a part of the advantage in the promotion lottery is different.

<AT state lottery>
The AT state lottery is, for example, when the set of the AT state is started (for example, when the start game of the set of the AT state or the transition to the next set of the AT state), the AT state of the set (for example, when moving to the next set of the AT state). It is performed to determine either the AP normal state or the AP high probability state).

The AT state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the AT state lottery table shown in FIG. 44, and one of the AT states (AP normal state or AP) has a probability according to the current advantageous section mode and the AT transition type. High probability state) is to be determined. In the AT transition type, "first set" indicates that it is the first set in which the so-called first hit BB state ends and the AT state starts, and "BB" indicates the judge reward described later. In the lottery and the final revival lottery of the judges, the reward "weak BB" or "strong BB" is determined, and it indicates that the set is the set in which the BB state is terminated and the AT state is started. Further, the AT state (AP normal state or AP high probability state) shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and three or more types of AT states are provided as AT states in which at least a part differs in the degree of advantage in various lottery related to AP grant. It is also possible.

<AP grant lottery>
As described above, the AP grant lottery in the AT state includes the AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed), the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the strong bell is displayed), and the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the self-powered bell is displayed). During the AT state, the number of times "bell" is displayed continuously (number of bells) is counted, and in the AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed), the AP to be granted is determined according to the number of bells. To. It should be noted that the number of bells is counted not only by the "pushing order bell" described later but also by the "common bell" and the "strong bell". In addition, if the number of bells is won in a predetermined rare role (for example, "cherry", "watermelon", "chance eye", "fixed role" described later), the count will not be cleared, and other roles will not be cleared. In some cases, the count is cleared when the "bell" is not displayed in the end.

For example, in the AT state, when a certain game is started as a starting point and a "bell" is displayed in the first game by winning a "push order bell", a "common bell" or a "strong bell", the number of bells is " 1 ”. If you win the "replay" in the second game (since "bell" is not displayed, of course), the number of bells is cleared and becomes "0". Further, when the winning "bell" is displayed in the "pushing order bell", "common bell" or "strong bell" in the second game, the number of bells is added by 1 to become "2". Also, if you win the "Watermelon" in the second game (although "Bell" is not displayed), the number of bells will not be cleared and will remain "1" because it is a predetermined rare role, and then in the third game. When the "bell" is displayed by winning the "push order bell", "common bell" or "strong bell", the number of bells is incremented by 1 to become "2".

In the AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed), for example, the AP to be granted according to the fact that the number of bells is "1" or more (that is, "bell" is displayed) at the end of each game is assigned. Made to decide. In addition, the lottery is configured as a lottery for determining the AP to be given (may not be given) when "bell" is displayed in the game without using the number of bells. You can also do it.

The AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed) is performed, for example, with reference to the "bell display time" table of the AP grant lottery shown in FIG. The grant value (grant AP) is determined. The given AP shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and the value to be added can be appropriately set. For example, as a guide, since the judge level level is raised by one paragraph at "+20", AP grant values such as "+40" and "+60" may be set.

The AP grant lottery (additional lottery at the time of strong bell) is, for example, when the "bell" is displayed in the game according to the winning of the "strong bell" described later, the AP grant lottery (bell). In addition to the lottery result (at the time of display), it is performed to decide to additionally grant AP.

The AP grant lottery (additional lottery at the time of strong bell) is performed with reference to, for example, the additional lottery table at the time of strong bell shown in FIG. 44, and the AP grant value (grant AP) is determined with a probability according to the current AT state. It is supposed to be done.

The AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the self-powered bell is displayed) is, for example, when the "bell" is finally displayed even though the navigation is not executed in the game (that is, the player corrects the answer by himself / herself). (When the push order is selected), in addition to the lottery result of the AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed), it is performed to determine to additionally grant AP.

The AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the self-powered bell is displayed) is performed by referring to, for example, the additional lottery table when the self-powered bell is displayed as shown in FIG. 44, and the AP grant value (granted AP) is performed with a probability according to the current AT state. Is to be decided.

<Lv. 5 Promotion lottery>
Lv. 5 The promotion lottery is performed to determine, for example, whether or not the judge level set in the set is set to "Lv.5" when the target combination is won during the AT state.

Lv. 5 The promotion lottery is, for example, Lv. 5 The promotion lottery table is used as a reference, and "Lv.5" is set with a probability according to the current promotion status, the cumulative value of the current AP, and the internal winning combination determined in the game. It is determined either that (“winning”) or that “Lv.5” is not set (“non-winning”). Even when the above-mentioned number of bells is a predetermined value (for example, 5 or more), the lottery is performed (for example, with the same probability as at the time of winning the "chance" in the Lv.5 promotion lottery table). You may be asked.

<All navigation status lottery>
As described above, the AT state is a game state that constitutes an "increasing section" in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, but the game that wins the "push order bell" does not necessarily have "all navigation". It is configured as a gaming state that may not occur. The all-navigation state lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a state in which "all-navigation" can be executed during the AT state for a certain period (for example, a period in which 5 games are set as one set). ..

In the "all navigation state", one set of five games is set as one unit, and a plurality of units may be given at one time. In addition, since 1 unit is managed according to the number of games, if the "push order bell" is won 5 times between 5 games, "all navigation" is executed 5 times, while the "push order bell" is performed once. If you do not win, "All Navi" will not be executed even once. In this way, the situation of granting APs and medals is caused ups and downs, and the interest of the game is enhanced. However, the management method of "all navigation state" is not limited to this. For example, it may be managed according to the number of times "all navigation" is executed. That is, once one set is given, the "all navigation state" may be continued until at least the "all navigation" is executed five times. Alternatively, it may be managed by the number of games without the concept of the number of sets, or may be managed by the so-called difference number.

The all-navigation state lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. 45, and the all-navigation state has a probability corresponding to the current AT state and the internal winning combination determined in the game. Do not give the number of games (total number of navigation games) (“non-winning”), give the total number of navigation games for one set (“1 set”), and give the total number of navigation games for two sets. ("2 sets") Granting the total number of navigation games for 3 sets ("3 sets"), Granting the total number of navigation games for 5 sets ("5 sets"), Precursor state (2 games) ), And then give the total number of navigation games for one set (“1 set + precursor”), and after going through the precursor state (2 games), give the total number of navigation games for two sets. ("2 sets + precursor"), granting the total number of navigation games for 3 sets after going through the precursor state (2 games) ("3 sets + precursor"), via the precursor state (2 games) After that, it is decided whether to grant the total number of navigation games for 5 sets ("5 sets + precursor").

The precursory states of all navigation states are defined as two predetermined games, but the number of precursory games may be determined by lottery, or the precursory states may not be provided. In addition, the lottery for all navigation states is performed even during the stay in all navigation states, and if this is won, the total number of navigation games will be added and the all navigation states will be extended, but once all When the navigation state lottery is won and all navigation states are entered, the all navigation state lottery may not be performed until the total number of navigation games becomes 0 and the all navigation states are completed.

In addition, if the total number of navigation games for multiple sets is given during the AT state, the AT state basically does not end until all the total number of navigation games are exhausted (the transition to the judge state is awaited). ), But in the AT state, if the total number of navigation games exceeding one set (30 games) in the AT state (for example, the total number of navigation games of 7 sets or more) is given, all When the specified number of games (30 games) in the AT state of the set is exhausted (or now) instead of waiting for the transition from the AT state of the set to the judge state until all the navigation games are exhausted. It is determined that the AT state is pseudo-terminated at the end of the set of all navigation states during digestion, and the AT state is always extended in the judge state that has transitioned thereafter (for example, "all". "Navigation" may be generated, or the judge may be successful in all roles), and the AT state may be extended to the next set. Further, in this case, the undigested number of all the navigation games given in the set may be carried over to the next set so that it can be digested.

In addition, when the total number of navigation games is given during the AT state, the player is basically notified (or suggested) of the current total number of remaining navigation games (which may include the number of sets). However, for example, when the total number of navigation games for a plurality of sets is given, in the notification, all the total number of navigation games are added up and shown to the player (for example, two sets). If the total number of navigation games for the minute is given, "10 games remaining" is displayed, and the display is sequentially decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted, etc.), or one set. The total number of navigation games is shown to the player for each (for example, when the total number of navigation games for two sets is given, "5 games remaining" is displayed for the first set, and one game is consumed. The display is subtracted by 1 each time, and when "0 games remaining" is displayed, then "5 games remaining" is displayed again for the second set, and then the same subtraction display is sequentially performed. ) Can also be done. It should be noted that such notification is not limited to the countdown method display, and may be a countup method display.

<Navigation lottery during AT>
As described above, in the AT state, "all navigation" is always executed when all navigation is in the state, but even when not in all navigation state, information on the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is available. It may be notified. The AT-during navigation lottery is performed to determine whether to execute "all navigation" or some navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation") when the total number of navigation games is not one or more.

The AT-during navigation lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the AT-during navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 45, depending on the current AT state, the cumulative value of the current AP, and the internal winning combination determined in the game. With a certain probability, it is determined whether to execute "all navigation", to execute some navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation"), or to perform no navigation. In the AT-during navigation lottery, the "four-choice navigation" is not determined, but it can be configured so that it can be determined.

<Navi lottery during the judge>
Judged navigation lottery is a game in which the "pushing order bell" described later is determined as the internal winning combination in the judge state, and information on the stop operation that is advantageous for displaying the "bell" (all or part of the correct answer pushing order). Information) is performed to determine whether or not to notify. That is, in the above-mentioned extension propriety determination, it is determined whether or not to improve the probability of successful extension.

When the judge level is "Lv.1" to "Lv.3", for example, refer to the "Lv.1 to Lv.3 o'clock" table of the judge's navigation lottery shown in FIG. 45. Whether to execute "all navigation" or some navigation (for example, "4 choice navigation" or "2 choice navigation") with a probability according to the current advantageous section mode and the number of judges. Is determined. In the "Lv.1 to Lv.3 o'clock" of the navigation lottery during the judge, "no navigation" is not determined, but it can be configured so that this can be determined.

Here, focusing on the number of judges, it is easier to execute the navigation that is more advantageous in the "second time" than in the "first time", and it is easier to execute the navigation that is more advantageous in the "third time" than in the "second time". There is. In addition, as described above, when the judge level is "Lv.1", the decision on whether to extend or not is made only once, so the navigation lottery during the judge can be received only with the probability specified in the "first time". .. On the other hand, when the judge level is "Lv.2", the decision on whether or not to extend is made twice, so the navigation lottery during the judge was received with the probability specified in "1st time", and the extension was not successful here. Even in that case, next time, you can receive the Navi lottery during the judge with the probability specified in the "second time". In addition, when the judge level is "Lv.3", the decision on whether to extend or not is made three times, so the navigation lottery during the judge was received with the probability specified in the "first time", and the extension was not successful here. Even in that case, the next time you can receive the Navi lottery during the judge with the probability specified in the "2nd time", and even if the extension is not successful here, the next time is the probability specified in the "3rd time". It is possible to receive a navigation lottery during the judge. That is, the change in the judge level is not limited to the change in the number of times of the decision on whether to extend or not, but also leads to the change in the degree of expectation of the decision on whether or not to extend.

Further, when the judge level is "Lv.0", the judge middle navigation lottery is performed by referring to the "Lv.0 o'clock" table of the judge middle navigation lottery shown in FIG. 45, for example, and "all navigation" is performed. It is decided whether to execute or not to execute the navigation ("No navigation"). In the "Lv.0 o'clock" of the judge middle navigation lottery, "4-choice navigation" and "2-choice navigation" are not determined, but it can be configured so that this can be determined.

<Judge reward lottery>
The judge reward lottery is performed to determine the mode of extension (contents of benefits given to the player) when the result of the decision on whether or not to extend is successful in the judge state. The mode of extension is roughly divided into an extension to the next set of the AT state and an extension to the next set of the AT state via the BB state. "Continuing type 1" to "continuation type 4" indicate the former, and "weak BB" and "strong BB" indicate the latter.

Further, "continuation type 1" to "continuation type 4" have different probabilities that the AP high probability state is set in the above-mentioned AT state lottery. That is, it is set as information that can change the degree of advantage in the next set to be extended. However, the mode of varying the degree of advantage in the next set to be extended is not limited to this. Also in various other lottery performed in the AT state, the continuation type is individually referred to, and the lottery is performed according to the lottery value corresponding to the continuous type, so that the degree of advantage in the next set to be extended may be changed. Further, the degree of advantage between "weak BB" and "strong BB" can be set so as to have an appropriate difference as described above, but for example, in the above-mentioned AT state lottery, in the case of "weak BB". And, the probability that the AP high accuracy state is set differs between the case of "strong BB" (for example, the probability that the AT high accuracy state is set is higher in the case of "strong BB"), which is advantageous. The degree may be varied.

The judge reward lottery is based on the fact that the judge level is "Lv.0" to "Lv.3" and the "pushing order bell" described later is displayed in the game in which the internal winning role is determined. When the decision result of the extension approval / disapproval decision is the extension success, for example, it is performed with reference to the "Lv.0 to Lv.3 judge success" table of the judge reward lottery shown in FIG. 46, and the current advantageous section is performed. The mode and the current judge level (for example, if the judge level at the time of transition to the judge state is "Lv.2" and the first judge succeeds, it remains "Lv.2", but the first time. If the judge fails in the above and succeeds in the second judge, it becomes "Lv.1"), and one of the extension modes is determined with a probability.

Further, when the judge level is "Lv.4" or "Lv.5", the judge reward lottery uses, for example, the "Lv.4 · Lv.5 confirmed" table of the judge reward lottery shown in FIG. It is performed with reference to, and either extension mode is determined with a probability according to the current advantageous section mode and the internal winning combination of the game.

In addition, in the judge reward lottery, the judge level is "Lv.0" to "Lv.3", and the decision result of whether to extend or not is successful when the predetermined rare role is decided as the internal winning role. If this happens, for example, it is performed with reference to the "Lv.0 to Lv.3 winning combination success" table of the judge reward lottery shown in FIG. 46, and the internal winning combination of the game and the current judge level ( With a probability according to (similar to the above), one of the extension modes is determined.

<Judge final revival lottery>
The Judge Final Resurrection Lottery is held in the Judge Final State to allow for the so-called one-shot reversal and pullback opportunities. The mode of extension (contents of the privilege given to the player) that can be determined as a result of the lottery is the same as that in the judge reward lottery.

The judge final revival lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the judge final revival lottery table shown in FIG. 46, and one of the extension modes is determined with a probability according to the internal winning combination of the game.

In the final revival lottery table for judges shown in FIG. 46, the internal winning combination of the game is a specific internal winning combination (“cherry”, “watermelon”, “chance eye”, “strong bell”, “fixed role”, etc. It is assumed that the AT state can be extended only when it is a so-called rare role of, but this is an example, and an internal winning role other than these specific internal winning roles (for example, "replay" or "pushing order"). Even if it is a normal role such as "bell"), the AT state may be extended with any probability. This also applies to other lottery in which the lottery target combination is described as only a so-called rare combination in the present embodiment.

<All navigation status lottery>
The all-navigation state lottery is given in the AT state of the next set to be further extended according to the determined extension mode (reward) when the decision result of the extension permission decision is successful in the judge state. This is done to determine the total number of navigation games. In the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. 46, it is determined to grant the total number of navigation games when a specific extension mode is determined, but when any extension mode is determined. However, it may be decided whether or not to grant the total number of navigation games (including those not granted).

The all-navigation state lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. 46, and the total number of all-navigation games is determined with a probability according to the determined extension mode (reward). ..

As described above, when the set of AT states is started, the promotion state and the AT state (AP normal state or AP high probability state) are determined, and during the AT state, the result of granting the total number of navigation games or AT. Information on the stop operation is notified according to the result of the middle navigation lottery, and AP is given in consideration of these results. Then, when the cumulative value of AP becomes "80" or more, the judge level is set to "Lv.4", so that the AT state (to the next set) is extended in the judge state after the set digestion. Is confirmed. Also, when the judge level is promoted to "Lv.5", the extension of the AT state (to the next set) is confirmed in the judge state after the set is digested. If the extension of the AT state is not confirmed and the game of the set is digested, if the total number of navigation games is 0, the game shifts to the judge state. In the judge state, whether or not to extend is decided for the number of times (number of judges) according to the stage (“Lv.0” to “Lv.3”) set according to the cumulative value of AP, and if the extension is successful. , The mode of extension is determined, and the AT state is extended in the determined mode. On the other hand, if the extension is not successful even if the extension is decided for the number of judges, the final state of the judges will be entered. To. If the judge's final revival lottery cannot be won, the AT state ends without extension, the advantageous section also ends, and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section.

In the BB state, AT state, and judge state, when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section is 1800 or more (that is, when the value of the payout number counter in the advantageous section is "1800" or more), It shifts to the ending state constituting the above-mentioned "increasing section" in which "all navigation" always occurs, and the ending state continues until the advantageous section ends due to the limiter operation and shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. Since the ending state is a dedicated game state waiting for the limiter to operate, "all navigation" will always occur in the game that wins the "push order bell" described later, but the above-mentioned various lottery related to the game will not be performed.

Further, in the BB state and the AT state, for example, when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section is 1770 or more (that is, when the value of the payout number counter in the advantageous section is "1770" or more), the ending state is reached. It is possible to notify the player in advance of the transition to the ending state by shifting to the ending notice state for notifying the transition to the ending state and performing a dedicated ending notice effect.

Further, the ending transition conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, when the number of sets in the AT state (the number of AT sets) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 11 times) (that is, when the AT state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 360 games)), the ending state is entered. You may do it. Specifically, for example, when the number of AT sets reaches the 11th set, the ending state may be entered when the 11th set is completed. In this case, the ending state may be entered when the 11th set is completed, or the 11th set may be pseudo-judged after the 11th set is completed. , The "pushing order bell" described later may be made to always generate "all navigation" in the game determined as the internal winning combination, and the ending state may be entered when the "bell" is displayed. Further, for example, the number of AT sets becomes the 11th set, the set of the 11th set is completed and the state shifts to the judge state, and it is decided to extend the AT state by determining whether or not the extension is possible in the judge state. It may be made to shift to the state.

Further, the ending condition of the ending state is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, when the predetermined number of fixed games (for example, any number of games such as 101 games) is exhausted after the ending state is started, the ending state ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section (standby state). You may do so. Further, as in the above-mentioned example, a plurality of transition conditions to the ending state may be provided, and the transition to the ending state may be performed according to the transition condition that is the earliest among the plurality of transition conditions. Further, the ending condition of the ending state may be set according to the established transition condition. For example, in the ending state where the transition condition is satisfied when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section becomes 1800 or more, the limiter operation is set as the end condition, and the transition condition is set according to the number of AT sets being 11 times. In the established ending state, the above-mentioned fixed number of games digestion may be set as an end condition.

<Example of game flow in AT state and judge state>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of the flow of the game in the AT state and the judge state will be described. 41 (a) and 41 (b) are examples of a case where the AT state shifts to the judge state and the extension fails in the judge state, and FIGS. 40 (c) to 40 (e) show the judge from the AT state. This is an example of a case where the player shifts to the state and the extension is successful in the judge state.

In addition, in (a) to (e) of FIG. 41, the "game number elapsed" indicates the pure game number elapsed, and the "remaining game number" can stay in the AT state and the judge state. The "winning combination" indicates that the number of games is reduced, the "winning combination" indicates the internal winning combination determined in the corresponding game, and the "display result" is the final according to the player's stop operation. Indicates the stop display mode (symbol combination) displayed in, "AP" indicates the cumulative value of AP, and the game state is either the AT state or the judge state of the corresponding game. It indicates whether it is in a state.

In (a) of FIG. 41, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state is digested from the 1st to 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "69" by the 27th game. Then, the 28th game is set as the first game (1G) of the "game number elapsed", and the subsequent flow is explained. In the second game (2G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "common bell", so the number of bells was "1", and the AP "1" was given by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is supposed to be. Also, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "pushing order bell", so the number of bells became "2", and the AP "3" was obtained by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). Is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv.3" is set according to the cumulative value "73" of the current AP, and the game shifts to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the 4th game (4G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the decision on whether to extend or not is made, and the judge level remains "Lv.3". Also, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", it was decided whether or not to extend it, and the "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). Since the extension failed and the number of judges was exhausted once, the judge level has dropped to "Lv.2". Also, in the 6th game (6G), since the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", it was decided whether or not to extend it, and the "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). Since the extension failed and the number of judges was exhausted once, the judge level has dropped to "Lv.1".

Also, in the 7th game (7G), since the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", it was decided whether or not to extend it, and the "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). The extension fails, the number of judges is exhausted once, the number of judges becomes 0, and the final state of the judge is entered (when the judge level is "Lv.1", "Lv.1" is changed to "Lv.0". No descent). Then, in the 8th game (8G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the final revival lottery for the judges is not performed, and it is confirmed that there will be no extension (extension failure) in the end.

In (b) of FIG. 41, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state is digested from the 1st to 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "9" by the 27th game. Then, the 28th game is set as the first game (1G) of the "game number elapsed", and the subsequent flow is explained. In the second game (2G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "common bell", so the number of bells was "1", and the AP "1" was given by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is supposed to be. Also, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "pushing order bell", so the number of bells became "2", and the AP "3" was obtained by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). Is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv.0" is set according to the cumulative value "13" of the current AP, and the game shifts to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the 4th game (4G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the decision on whether to extend or not is made. Also, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", it was decided whether or not to extend it, and the "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). Since the extension failed and the judge level was originally "Lv.0", the final state of the judge will be entered as it is. Then, in the sixth game (6G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the final revival lottery for the judges is not performed, and it is confirmed that there will be no extension (extension failure) in the end.

In (c) of FIG. 41, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state is digested from the 1st to 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "69" by the 27th game. Then, the 28th game is set as the first game (1G) of the "game number elapsed", and the subsequent flow is explained. In the second game (2G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "common bell", so the number of bells was "1", and the AP "1" was given by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is supposed to be. Also, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "pushing order bell", so the number of bells became "2", and the AP "3" was obtained by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). Is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv.3" is set according to the cumulative value "73" of the current AP, and the game shifts to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the 4th game (4G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the decision on whether to extend or not is made, and the judge level remains "Lv.3". Also, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", it was decided whether or not to extend it, and the "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). Since the extension failed and the number of judges was exhausted once, the judge level has dropped to "Lv.2".

Also, in the 6th game (6G), since the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", it is decided whether or not to extend it, and since the "bell" is displayed in the game, the extension is successful and the judge reward lottery is done. It is determined that the AT state is extended according to the determined extension mode.

In (d) of FIG. 41, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state is digested from the 1st to 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "9" by the 27th game. Then, the 28th game is set as the first game (1G) of the "game number elapsed", and the subsequent flow is explained. In the second game (2G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "common bell", so the number of bells was "1", and the AP "1" was given by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is supposed to be. Also, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "pushing order bell", so the number of bells became "2", and the AP "3" was obtained by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). Is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv.0" is set according to the cumulative value "13" of the current AP, and the game shifts to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the 4th game (4G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the decision on whether to extend or not is made. Also, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", it was decided whether or not to extend it, and the "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). Since the extension failed and the judge level was originally "Lv.0", the final state of the judge will be entered as it is. However, in the 6th game (6G), since the internal winning role is "watermelon", the judge final revival lottery is performed, and finally the extension is successful, and the AT state is extended according to the determined extension mode. It is assumed that it has been confirmed.

In (e) of FIG. 41, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state is digested from the 1st to 28th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "79" by the 28th game. Then, the 29th game is set as the first game (1G) of the "game number elapsed", and the subsequent flow is explained. In the second game (2G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "common bell", so the number of bells was "1", and the AP "1" was given by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is supposed to be. Then, since the game period of the set ends in the second game (2G), the judge level "Lv.4" is set according to the cumulative value "80" of the current AP, and the game shifts to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the third game (3G), the internal winning combination is "replay", but since the judge level is "Lv.4", the extension is successful and the judge reward lottery is performed, and the determined extension mode is adopted. Therefore, it is determined that the AT state will be extended.

<A game machine that uses the playability of the AT state and the judge state>
In the second gaming machine, for example, by using the above-mentioned playability in the AT state and the judge state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

For example, it has an AT state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and a judge state in which it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the AT state. When a unit (for example, 30 games per set) is played, the game shifts to the judge state, and when it is decided to extend the AT state in the judge state, the AT state shifts to the next unit, and in the judge state. If it is not decided to extend the AT state, the AT state can be terminated in the unit, "AP" can be given in the AT state, and at least the unit is in the judge state. It is a gaming machine capable of making an extension propriety decision for determining whether or not to extend the AT state by the number of times corresponding to the "AP" given in the AT state.

In the second gaming machine, the expected value of the grant probability of "AP" (similar to the above-mentioned "BP" and "CP") and the number of executions of the extension possibility determination are not limited to those described above. For example, the winning probability of "pushing order bell", the display probability of "bell" (for example, the number of correct push order choices and the range of pressing positions), the winning probability of "common bell", some navigation and all navigation It is possible to set appropriately within the range where the gambling property does not become excessively high, taking into consideration the execution probability and the like comprehensively.

Further, for example, the condition for granting "AP" includes that "bell" is displayed, and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order in the game in which "push order bell)" is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, "bell" is displayed, while when the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, a symbol combination different from "bell" is displayed, and the "pushing order bell" is displayed in the AT state. ) ”Is determined as an internal winning combination, it is a gaming machine capable of notifying information on a stop operation (for example, 2-choice navigation or all navigation) that is advantageous for displaying the“ bell ”.

In addition, for example, when the "pushing order bell" informs the information of the stop operation which is advantageous for displaying the "bell" in the game determined as the internal winning combination, the "all navigation" in which all the correct answer pressing orders are notified. This is a gaming machine that may perform "2-choice navigation" as a partial navigation that informs a part of the correct answer pressing order.

Further, for example, when determining the notification mode of the navigation to be executed, a gaming machine capable of continuing a state in which "all navigation" can be performed over a plurality of games in the AT state (for example, the all navigation state). be.

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine that can determine a "common bell" that allows the "bell" to be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation as an internal winning combination.

In addition, for example, in a game in which the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination in the AT state, if the "bell" can be displayed by itself without executing the navigation, an additional "AP" is given. It is a gaming machine that may be played.

Further, for example, the decision on whether to extend or not in the judge state is performed in the game in which the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, and it is decided to extend the AT state when the "bell" is displayed in the game. It is a gaming machine that can execute navigation even when the "pushing order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination in the judge state.

Further, for example, when "AP" is given in the AT state, the judge level (for example, Lv.0 to Lv.5), which is a stage according to the accumulated grant result, can be set, and is set in the judge state. It is a gaming machine that can determine whether or not to extend the number of times (the number of judges) according to the judge level.

Further, for example, in the judge state, when the set judge level is "Lv.4" or higher, it is a gaming machine that is always determined to extend the AT state.

Further, for example, in the AT state, regardless of the cumulative value of "AP", it is a gaming machine capable of determining whether or not the set judge level is set to the highest "Lv.5".

It is desirable that the judge level (which may be the cumulative value of AP) is suggested or notified in the AT state and the judge state. This may be realized, for example, by the above-mentioned gauge-shaped display, or may be realized by displaying the acquisition right corresponding to the number of judges. Specifically, in the AT state, when the cumulative value of AP is 0 to 19, the number of rights "0" or the extension expectation degree "white" is displayed, and when the cumulative value of AP is 20 to 39, it is displayed. The number of rights "1" or the expected degree of extension "blue" is displayed, and when the cumulative value of AP is 40 to 59, the number of rights "2" or the expected degree of extension "yellow" is displayed and the cumulative value of AP. When is 60 to 79, the number of rights "3" or the extension expectation degree "green" is displayed, and when the cumulative value of AP is 80 or more, the number of rights "4 (extension confirmed)" or the extension expectation degree is displayed. "Red" is displayed, and Lv. 5 When the promotion lottery is won, the number of rights "MAX (extension confirmed)" or the extension expectation degree "gold" may be displayed.

Further, for example, when it is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, the BB state is different from the AT state, and it is determined to extend the AT state in the judge state. , A gaming machine capable of shifting to the BB state and then shifting to the next unit.

In the second gaming machine, when one unit of gaming is played in the AT state, the machine shifts to the judge state, and in the judge state, whether or not the extension is possible for the number of times according to the "AP" given during the AT state. It is assumed that the decision is made, but the method for deciding whether or not to prolong the AT state is not limited to this. For example, the judge state is a state in which the player can stay for a plurality of games, but the judge state may be configured as a state in which only one game can be stayed. In this case, in the one game, it may be possible to determine whether or not to extend the number of times according to the "AP". Alternatively, in the final game of the AT state (or, for example, between the remaining 3 games and 1 game of the AT state) without defining the unique game state of the "judgment state", the number of times corresponding to the "AP" May be made to decide whether or not to extend. That is, it suffices if there is at least one game in which the extension propriety decision can be made between the time when the AT state for one unit ends (or just before the end) and the time when the AT state for the next unit starts. The specifications are not limited to those described above.

Further, for example, the number of times of extension possibility determination is changed according to the "AP" given during the AT state, but the degree of advantage of extension possibility decision is changed by changing the factors other than the number of times. You may. For example, the winning probability of successful extension in the extension approval / disapproval decision may be different depending on the "AP" given during the AT state. As an example, regardless of whether the judge level is "Lv.0" to "Lv.3", the number of extension approval / disapproval decisions is one, and when the judge level is "Lv.0", there is a 5% probability that the extension will be successful. At the judge level "Lv.1", there is a 10% chance of winning the extension success, and at the judge level "Lv.2", there is a 25% chance of winning the extension success. However, when the judge level is "Lv.3", there is a 50% chance of winning the extension success (in this case, refer to the internal winning combination, and although there is a difference in the winning probability between the internal winning combination, The total probability may be the above-mentioned winning probability, or (although only the "fixed combination" has a 100% probability of winning), basically, the internal winning combination is not referred to, and the above-mentioned probability is uniformly used. The lottery may be done).

Further, for example, even if the probability that "all navigation" occurs (as a result, the extension is successful) is different in the game in which the extension possibility decision is made according to the "AP" given during the AT state. good. As an example, regardless of whether the judge level is "Lv.0" to "Lv.3", the number of extension approval / disapproval decisions is one, and when the judge level is "Lv.0", there is a 5% probability of "all". It is assumed that "navigation" will occur, "all navigation" will occur with a 10% probability at the judge level "Lv.1", and "all navigation" will occur with a 25% probability at the judge level "Lv.2". It is assumed that "navigation" occurs, and when the judge level is "Lv.3", "all navigation" may occur with a probability of 50%.

That is, for example, it has an AT state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and it is possible to make an extension propriety decision to determine whether or not to extend the AT state. It can be executed according to the game of one unit (for example, one set of 30 games) in the AT state, and when it is decided to extend the AT state by the extension propriety decision, the AT state is next. It is possible to shift to a unit and terminate the AT state in the unit when it is not decided to extend the AT state by the decision of whether to extend it, and in the AT state, it is possible to give "AP". It is also possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making an extension approval / disapproval decision at least according to the "AP" given in the AT state of the unit.

[10-2. Design layout configuration of the second gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 47, the symbol arrangement configuration of the second gaming machine will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the second gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 47, in the second gaming machine, "red 7", "blue 7", "black BAR", "white BAR", "watermelon", "cherry", "blank", "replay", Ten types of symbols "bell 1" and "bell 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 47 on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[10-3. Internal winning combination of the second gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55, the internal winning combination configuration of the second gaming machine will be described. 48 and 49 are views showing an example of an internal lottery table of the second gaming machine. Further, FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the second gaming machine and the symbol combination. Further, FIGS. 51 to 53 are views showing an example of a symbol combination table of the second gaming machine. Further, FIGS. 54 and 55 are diagrams showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the second gaming machine, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like. That is, in the following, any symbol is used according to the type of the internal winning combination drawn in the second gaming machine and the stop operation mode (that is, batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (Display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) will be described.

In the second game machine, in the above-mentioned internal lottery process (see FIG. 26), the probability (lottery value / probability) shown in FIG. 48 when each internal winning combination shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 is in a two-card bet state. Win with the denominator: 65536), and in the three-card bet state, win with the probability (lottery value / probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 50. Further, in FIGS. 50 to 53, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a small combination. , "HZR" indicates a combination of symbols related to a specific outlier.

"F_2BB" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a two-card bet state between non-flags, while an internal winning combination is determined when a game is played in a three-card betting state. It is configured so that it is not determined as. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-card bet state, "BB01" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ (when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the corresponding symbol can be stopped) for each reel. While shifting to the 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB), if the pressing position × (when the stop operation is not performed at the timing when the corresponding symbol can be stopped), "BB01" is not displayed. In addition, there is no case of "missing" between the 2BB flags, and the combination of the symbols related to the replay combination and the small combination is controlled to be stopped preferentially over the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination, so that the 2BB is performed. Even between the flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in the two-card bet state. Further, since "F_2BB" is a bonus combination dedicated to the 2-card bet state, "BB01" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet state even between the 2BB flags.

"F_3BB" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a three-card bet state between non-flags, while an internal winning combination is determined when a game is played in a two-card betting state. It is configured so that it is not determined as. In the game in which "F_3BB" wins in the 3-card bet state and the game becomes "missing" in the 3-card bet state between the 3BB flags, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, "BB02" is displayed and 3BB. While shifting to the state (bonus state based on 3BB), if the pressing position × (when the stop operation is not performed at the timing when the corresponding symbol can be stopped), "BB02" is not displayed. Further, since "F_3BB" is a bonus combination dedicated to the 3-card bet state, "BB02" may not be displayed in the 2-card bet state even between the 3BB flags.

"F_Bell A123", "F_Bell A132", "F_Bell A213", "F_Bell A231", "F_Bell A312A", "F_Bell A312B", "F_Bell A321A", and "F_Bell A321B" are In the non-bonus state, it is configured so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. It should be noted that these are internal winning combinations described as "pushing order bells" in the second gaming machine, but here, in order to distinguish them from those described as "pushing order bells B" described later, "pushing order bells" are used here. It is explained as "A".

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the "pushing order bell A" is a 6-choice push order small combination (the batting order of any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If it is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "bell" symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. (Any of "FRU01" to "FRU08") is displayed, and 9 medals are paid out in the 3-card bet state, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-card bet state.

On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct press order, and if the correct answer is given in the press order of the first stop operation, the display is permitted regardless of the timing of the stop operation. (Any one of "FRU14" to "FRU63") is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets. If the pressing order of the first stop operation is not correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 (a total probability of 1/4) for each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. If the pressing position is ○, the symbol combination of “1 card combination” that is allowed to be displayed is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets, but if the pressing position is ×, a dropout occurs. No medals will be paid out.

"F_Bell B123", "F_Bell B132", "F_Bell B213", "F_Bell B231", "F_Bell B312A", "F_Bell B312B", "F_Bell B321A", and "F_Bell B321B" are In the non-bonus state, it is configured so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. It should be noted that these are internal winning combinations described as "pushing order bells" in the second gaming machine, but are described here as "pushing order bells B".

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the "pushing order bell B" is a 6-choice push order small combination (one of the "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If it is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "bell" symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Is displayed, 9 medals are paid out if the player is in a 3-bet state, and 3 medals are paid out if the player is in a 2-card bet state.

On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct press order, and if the correct answer is given in the press order of the first stop operation, the display is permitted regardless of the timing of the stop operation. The symbol combination of "" is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets. If the pressing order of the first stop operation is not correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 (a total probability of 1/4) for each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. If the pressing position is ○, the symbol combination of “1 card combination” that is allowed to be displayed is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets, but if the pressing position is ×, a dropout occurs. No medals will be paid out.

However, unlike the "push order bell A", the "push order bell B" has three small push orders between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags in the two-card bet state and between the 3BB flags in the three-card bet state. Since it is configured to be useful (that is, if the first stop operation is the correct answer, this is the correct answer pressing order), if the correct answer is given in the pressing order of the first stop operation, the timing of the stop operation Regardless of the above, the "bell" symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed is displayed, 9 medals are paid out if the 3-card bet state, and 3 medals are paid out if the 2-card bet state. It will be like.

Although it is a combination of "bell" symbols, for example, when "Replay-Bell 1-Black BAR" of "FRU01" is displayed on the effective line (middle-middle-top), "bell" is displayed on the cross-down line. (Bell 1 or Bell 2) ”The symbols are displayed together. That is, "the" bell "is displayed" in the second gaming machine is not necessarily an effective line, but includes the fact that the "bell" symbols are displayed in a line that can be recognized by the player. Means. However, the effective line is configured without making it an irregular line, and the symbol combination is configured so that the "bell" symbols can be displayed together on the effective line, and this is displayed as "bell". It can also be configured to be included in. Moreover, such a configuration is the same for other symbols. In addition, "matching symbols" means that not only the same symbols are aligned on each reel, but also different symbols, but the symbols that the player can identify (or have such an idea) are aligned. It shall also be included.

"F_common bell A", "F_common bell B", and "F_common bell C" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that these are internal winning roles described as "common bells" in the second gaming machine. When the "common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, the "bell" symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and 9 medals are displayed in the 3-bet state. It is paid out, and if it is in a two-bet state, three medals are paid out.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that this is an internal winning combination described as "cherry" in the second gaming machine. When "cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for the reel 3L, the symbol combination of "cherry" ("FRU11") is displayed, and two medals are paid out regardless of the number of bets. Ru. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, the symbol combination (“HZR05”) of “cherry spill” is displayed. Since the symbol combination of "cherry spill" is a symbol combination related to "missing", medals are not paid out.

"F_watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that this is an internal winning combination described as "watermelon" in the second gaming machine. When "watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for the reel 3C, the symbol combination of "watermelon" (either "FRU09" or "FRU10") is displayed, regardless of the number of bets. Three medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the symbol combination of “watermelon spill” (“FRU12” or “FRU13”) is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets (configured so that the spill occurs). You can also do it).

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that this is an internal winning combination described as "replay" in the second gaming machine. When the "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination ("REP21") of the "rip alignment" is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the replay is given.

"F_Replay B", "F_Replay C", and "F_Replay D" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a three-card bet state in a non-bonus state, while 2 When the game is played in the state of a single bet, it is configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that these are internal winning combinations described as "special" in the second gaming machine. When "special" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, the display is permitted "BAR alignment" (including the combination of "black BAR" symbol and "white BAR" symbol). (Any of the symbol combinations that are "BAR aligned" among "REP25" to "REP34") is displayed, and if the pressing position is ×, the symbol combinations of other replay roles that are permitted to be displayed are displayed. (Any one of "REP21" to "REP24" or a combination of symbols among "REP25" to "REP34" that does not match "BAR") is displayed, and a replay is given.

"F_Chance A", "F_Chance B", "F_Chance C", "F_Chance D", and "F_Replay E" are played in a non-bonus state with three bets. In such a case, it may be determined as an internal winning combination, but when a game is played in a two-card bet state, it may not be determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that these are internal winning roles described as "chance eyes" in the second gaming machine. If the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the symbol combination of "chance lip" that is permitted to be displayed (Any of "REP03" to "REP15") is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in either "Batting order 5" or "Batting order 6", the symbol combination of "Rip alignment" ("REP21"" is displayed. ) Is displayed and the replay is given.

"F_strong bell A" and "F_strong bell B" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a three-card bet state in a non-bonus state, while a game is played in a two-card bet state. It is configured so that if is performed, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that these are internal winning roles described as "strong bells" in the second gaming machine. If the "strong bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the "bell-matched lip" symbol that is allowed to be displayed is displayed. When the combination (either "REP01" or "REP02") is displayed (that is, "bell" is displayed) and the stop operation is performed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", the stop operation is performed. The symbol combination (“REP21”) of “Rip alignment” is displayed, and the replay is given.

The "F_SP combination" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a three-card bet state in a non-bonus state, while an internal winning combination is determined when a game is played in a two-card betting state. It is configured so that it is not determined as a role. It should be noted that this is an internal winning combination described as a “fixed combination” in the second gaming machine. If the "fixed combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the symbol combination of "SP lip" that is permitted to be displayed (Any of "REP16" to "REP20") is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in either "Batting order 5" or "Batting order 6", the symbol combination of "Rip alignment" ("REP21"" is displayed. ) Is displayed and the replay is given.

The "F_RB combination A" is configured so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, but may not be determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When "F_RB combination A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the "bell" symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and nine medals are paid out. The "F_RB combination B" is configured so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, but may not be determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When "F_RB combination B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination of "one-card combination" that is permitted to be displayed is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and one medal is paid out. As described above, when the game is played in the recommended game state, it basically does not shift to the bonus state, so that there is no case of winning these internal winning combinations.

The internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the correspondence between the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 50 and the symbol combination, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, and the internal winning combination shown in FIGS. 54 and 55. The correspondence between the stop operation mode and the display combination and the like is merely an example, and the specifications of the second gaming machine are not limited to the modes shown in these.

[10-4. Second game machine instruction monitor configuration]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, an instruction monitor configuration (that is, a mode of notifying information on the stop operation) of the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, regarding the notification of the information of the stop operation, the presence / absence of the execution and the determination of the mode are controlled by the main control circuit 100 side. In the second gaming machine, the stop operation information is notified by the main side notification means and the sub side notification means, but the stop operation information is notified by only one of them. You can also. However, in any case, the control main body is still the main control circuit 100. In the second gaming machine, the content of the stop operation information notified by the gaming state or the like may change, and this will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, the "CZ1 final state", "CZ2 normal state", "RB state", "AT state", and "judgment state judge". At "Level Lv.1 to Lv.3 o'clock", it is determined whether to execute some navigation, execute all navigation, or no navigation according to the result of the navigation lottery ("Judge level Lv.0 in the judge state". "Time" is determined whether all navigation is executed or no navigation is performed). In addition, in the "BB state", "judgment level Lv.4 / Lv.5 o'clock in the judge state", "ending state", and "advantageous section 1500th game", the execution of all navigation is always determined. In addition, in the case of a game state other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation.

In addition, when "pushing order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination and some navigation is executed, multiple options may occur. For example, when "F_bell A123" executes "4 choice navigation" in a game determined as an internal winning combination, in the first stop operation, "left or middle" (instruction number "shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57". 10 ”) or“ left or right ”(see the instruction number“ 11 ”shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57). Therefore, when a plurality of options are generated in this way, one of the instruction numbers is determined by lottery with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 57, and the information of the stop operation according to the determined instruction number is notified. It is supposed to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when the "common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, "CZ1 final state", "CZ2 normal state", "AT state", and "judgment level Lv.1 in the judge state". At "~ Lv.3 o'clock", either partial navigation, full navigation execution, or no navigation is determined according to the result of the navigation lottery ("Judge level Lv.0 o'clock in the judge state" is determined. Either execution of all navigation or no navigation is decided). In addition, in the case of a game state other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation.

In addition, when the "common bell" is executed as a partial navigation or a full navigation in a game determined as an internal winning combination, multiple options may occur. For example, when "F_common bell A" executes "4 choice navigation" in a game determined as an internal winning combination, "left or middle" (instruction number shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57) in the first stop operation. Either "10"), "left or right" (see instruction number "11" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57), or "middle or right" (see instruction number "12" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57). Information may be notified. Further, for example, when the "2-choice navigation" is executed in the game in which "F_common bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, in the first stop operation, the "left first stop" (in the instruction information of FIG. 57). The instruction number "7" is shown), the "middle first stop" (see the instruction number "8" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57), or the "right first stop" (the instruction number "9" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57. (See)), any of the information may be notified.

Further, for example, when "F_common bell A" executes "all navigation" in a game determined as an internal winning combination, "left-middle-right" (see the instruction number "1" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). ), "Left-Right-Middle" (see the instruction number "2" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57), "Middle-Left-Right" (see the instruction number "3" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57), " "Middle-Right-Left" (see instruction number "4" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57), "Right-Left-Middle" (see instruction number "5" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57), or "Right-Middle". Any information of "-left" (see the instruction number "6" shown in the instruction information of FIG. 57) may be notified. Therefore, when a plurality of options are generated in this way, one of the instruction numbers is determined by lottery with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 57, and the information of the stop operation according to the determined instruction number is notified. It is supposed to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when "cherry", "watermelon", or "special" is determined as the internal winning combination, no navigation is always determined regardless of the gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when "replay" is determined as an internal winning combination, "AT state", "judgment level judge level Lv.4 / Lv.5 o'clock", "ending state", and "ending state", and "judgment state". In the "advantageous section 1500th game", the execution of all navigation is always decided. In addition, in the case of a game state other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation. In this case, any of the instruction numbers "1" to "6" may be determined. Therefore, as described above, the instruction number is determined by lottery with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 57. Information on the stop operation according to the determined instruction number is to be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when the "chance eye", the "strong bell", or the "determined combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined that the AP is given in the "AT state". In the case, and when the total number of navigation games is added, it is determined that there is no navigation, while in other cases, the execution of all navigation is determined. Further, in the "judgment level Lv.4 / Lv.5 o'clock in the judge state", the "ending state", and the "advantageous section 1500th game", the execution of all navigation is always determined. In addition, in the case of a game state other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation. In this case, any of the instruction numbers "1" to "6" may be originally determined, but "chance rip", "bell-aligned rip", or "SP rip" is displayed. Sorting lottery is performed by the sorting table shown in FIG. 57 so that either the instruction number "5" or "6" is determined under the playability of making it difficult for these winnings to be recognized. It has become.

[10-5. Lock production configuration of the second gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 58, the lock effect configuration of the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock effect in which the progress of the game is stopped or delayed for a certain period can be executed by the control of the main control circuit 100, and an example thereof is shown in FIG. 58 also in the second game machine. Various lock effects (including those in which reel effects are executed) are executed.

In FIG. 58, "time (ms)" indicates the execution period of the corresponding lock effect, "occurrence trigger" indicates the trigger for starting the corresponding lock effect, and "operation explanation" corresponds to the corresponding. It shows the contents of the rock production. Further, in the "occurrence trigger", the "lever" indicates that the start operation has been performed (that is, the start lever 7 has been operated), and the "3 stop OFF" means that the third stop operation is performed. This indicates that the stop operation has been completed (that is, the stop button of the third stop operation has been operated and the pressing operation on the stop button has been released). Further, in the "operation explanation", "game stop" means that the reel effect is not performed and the progress of the game is stopped (delayed / waited) for a period specified in "time (ms)".

For example, when the symbol combination of "Bell Lip" (the above-mentioned "Bell Matching Lip"), "Chance Lip", or "SP Lip" is displayed, the lock effect of "Strong Rare Role Lock" (lock number "1") is displayed. Will be executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the game that has transitioned to the final state of CZ1, if the instruction number (see FIG. 57) is either "0" or "10" to "12", "CZ1". If the lock effect of "Middle push order challenge 1" (lock number "2") is executed and the instruction number is any of "7" to "9", "CZ1 middle push order challenge 2" (lock number "3") is executed. ”) Is executed, and when the instruction number is any one of“ 1 ”to“ 6 ”, the lock effect of“ CZ1 middle push order challenge 3 ”(lock number“ 4 ”) is executed.

Further, for example, in the CZ state, when the third stop operation is completed in the game in which the BB lottery is won (including the case where the transition to the BB state is confirmed by winning the "fixed role"), the "CZ middle direct hit lock" is completed. "(Lock number" 5 ") is executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the RB state, any of "RB reel action 1" to "RB reel action 3" (lock numbers "6" to "8") is locked. Will be executed. It should be noted that which of these is executed may be determined by lottery, and for example, when three types of RB states having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, the start is started. Depending on the type of RB state, the lock effect corresponding to each may be executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the BB state (weak BB), the lock effect of the "weak BB reel action" (lock number "9") is executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the BB state (strong BB), the "strong BB reel action 1" or the "strong BB reel action 2" (lock number "10" or "11") One of the lock effects is executed. It should be noted that which of these to be executed may be determined by lottery, or for example, the ratio determined according to the degree of advantage of the AT state before and after that may be different. For example, in the case of the advantageous section mode A, the lock number "11" can be easily determined, and in the case of other than the advantageous section mode A, the lock number "10" can be easily determined so that the advantageous section mode can be suggested. May be good.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the BB state (freeze BB), the lock effect of the "freeze reel action" (lock number "12") is executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the special AT state, the lock effect of the "special AT reel action" (lock number "13") is executed.

Further, for example, when the player shifts to the ending state (for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the ending state), the lock effect of the "ED reel action" (lock number "14") is executed.

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in the game in which the RB state has ended, the "pseudo RB end lock" (lock number "15") is executed, and the third stop operation is completed in the game in which the BB state has ended. Occasionally, a "pseudo BB end lock" (lock number "16") is executed.

Further, for example, when the "push order bell" is won in a game during a stay at the judge level "Lv.0" to "Lv.3" in the judge state (that is, in a game in which an extension permission decision is made), the instruction number is given. If it is any of "10" to "12", the lock effect of "Judge middle push order challenge 1" (lock number "17") is executed, and the instruction number is any of "7" to "9". If it is, the lock effect of "Judge middle push order challenge 2" (lock number "18") is executed, and if the instruction number is any of "1" to "6", "Judge middle push order". The lock effect of "Challenge 3" (lock number "19") is executed, and if the instruction number is "0", the lock effect of "Judge middle push order challenge 4" (lock number "20") is executed. ..

Further, for example, when it is determined that AP "3" or more is given in the AT state and the instruction number is any of "1" to "6" (that is, all navigation may be executed). If it is determined), the lock effect of "all navigator short lock" (lock number "21") is executed. Even if the above conditions are satisfied, it may be determined whether or not the lock effect is executed by lottery.

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in the game immediately before the start of the ending state, the lock effect of "limiter lock" (lock number "22") is executed. The lock effect may be executed when the limiter is operated (that is, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the operation of the limiter).

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in the game in which the set in the AT state ends, the lock effect of "lock at the end of AT" (lock number "23") is executed.

Further, for example, in the judge state, when the third stop operation is completed in the game in which the AT state is determined to be extended, the lock effect of "lock when judge succeeds" (lock number "24") is executed.

When the main control circuit 100 executes various lock effects, the sub control circuit 200 is given a lock command including information that makes it possible for the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side) to recognize at least the type of lock effect to be executed. Send. Therefore, on the sub side, it is possible to execute an effect linked with the lock effect executed on the main side.

[10-6. Start time effect executed at the start of the RB state of the second gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, an example of the start-time effect executed at the start of the RB state in the second gaming machine will be described. In the present embodiment, various main side effects, various sub side effects, or a combination of these effects can be executed, and this point is the same for the second gaming machine, but in the following, in particular. The start-time effect executed at the start of the RB state will be described.

In FIGS. 59 and 60, the left column shows an example of the flow of the main side effect (lock effect), and the right column shows an example of the flow of the display mode in the effect display unit as the sub side effect. Is shown. Further, FIG. 59 shows an example of the flow of the effect when the BB promotion lottery is not won in the start game in the RB state, and FIG. 60 shows the BB promotion lottery in the start game in the RB state. It shows an example of the flow of the production of the case.

For example, it is assumed that the "1Gth" in FIG. 59 is staying in the final state of CZ1. As mentioned above, in the final state of CZ1, if a "bell" is displayed in the game, the game will shift to a pseudo-bonus state (rank up is not considered here). , "Bell" is displayed at the end of the game, the CZ1 reward lottery is performed, the reward is determined to be "RB", and the game shifts to the RB state from the next game. Further, at this time, the effect display unit executes a definite effect (for example, display of "bonus confirmed" in FIG. 59) indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state (here, the RB state) is confirmed. It is supposed to be. In addition, the final effect may be a deterministic notification of the transition to the RB state, or a deterministic notification of the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, but the type (RB or BB). It may not be notified until (whether there is).

Subsequently, it is assumed that the "2Gth" in FIG. 59 is staying in the starting game (first game) in the RB state. As described above, in the start game in the RB state, first, the reel effect in which the "white BAR" symbol alignment is displayed (here, "reel action 1 for RB" with the lock number "6") is executed, and then the game is concerned. Is to be started. Further, at this time, although the progress of the game itself is stopped (delayed), the internal winning combination is determined, the BB promotion lottery is performed, and the RB is performed according to the start operation of the game. Medium navigation lottery is being held. Therefore, in the game, it may be decided to shift from the next game to the BB state, and some navigation or all navigation may be executed in the game.

In addition, the effect display unit displays a start effect (for example, "RB start" in FIG. 59) indicating that the RB state is started at the timing when the "white BAR" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed by executing the reel effect. ) Is to be executed. After that, when the lock period related to the above reel effect ends, each reel starts normal rotation. Further, at this time, the effect display unit executes a selection effect (for example, display of "notification type selection ABC" in FIG. 59) for the player to select the effect mode in the RB state from a plurality of effect modes. It is supposed to be. Further, at this time, when the partial navigation or the entire navigation is executed in the game, the effect display unit is supposed to execute the notification related to the navigation.

Here, in the second gaming machine, as the notification type for suggesting the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery in the RB state, the notification type A which is a chance notification pattern, the notification type B which is a complete notification pattern, and the reel Notification type C, which is a notification pattern, is set. Note that these are just examples, and it is possible not to set this for some of these notification types, or it is possible to set other notification types that constitute notification patterns other than these.

In the notification type A, not only when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is a win, but also when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is non-winning, a production suggesting BB promotion (promotion suggestion production) is executed with a certain probability. By doing so, the production is a notification pattern that serves as a chance notification. Therefore, since the frequency at which the effect is executed is high (at least compared to the notification type B), there is an advantage that the degree of expectation can be increased by increasing the number of times the effect is executed, while the so-called Gase notification. It is a notification type that has the demerit that the reliability of the production (the probability of actually winning when it is executed) is low because it is also executed. A player who regards such a point as a merit is likely to select the notification type.

Further, the notification type B is a notification pattern in which the promotion suggestion effect is executed only when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is the winning result, so that the effect is a final notification. Therefore, since the so-called Gase notification is not executed, there is an advantage that the reliability of the production is high, but the frequency at which the production is executed is low (at least compared to the notification type A), so that the production is executed. The number of times is reduced, and it is a notification type that has the disadvantage that the degree of expectation cannot be raised in this respect. A player who regards such a point as a merit is likely to select the notification type.

Further, the notification type C has a notification pattern in which the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is not notified by the execution of the promotion suggestion effect. As described above, or as described below, when the BB promotion lottery is won in the RB state (when it is decided to shift to the BB state), when the next game is started (the start game in the BB state). , "Red 7" or "Blue 7" is displayed as a reel effect (see lock numbers "9" to "12" in FIG. 58). Therefore, the notification type is a notification pattern in which the transition of the BB state is notified for the first time by executing this reel effect. Therefore, since the notification is executed as if the reel production was suddenly executed and the state was changed to the BB state, there is an advantage that such notification can enhance the interest, but the number of times the production is executed is also announced. Since the number is reduced as in type B, it is a notification type that has the disadvantage that the degree of expectation cannot be increased in this respect. A player who regards such a point as a merit is likely to select the notification type.

Note that the notification types A to C notify the player of promotion to the BB state by different notification patterns, but all of them are "red 7" or "blue" in the next game of the game that wins the BB promotion lottery. The control on the main side that the reel effect that "7" is aligned is generated is common. Therefore, it is possible to realize various notifications by combining the notification pattern and the reel effect while saving the control load and the amount of data on the main side.

Then, after executing the selection effect, the effect button is operated (selection operation) by the player during the game of the game (“2Gth” in FIG. 59) to determine the desired notification type. In the effect display unit, a result effect (display of "A" after the selection operation in FIG. 59) indicating the selection result of the player's notification type is executed. In addition, when the third stop operation is performed without the selection operation by the player after the selection effect is executed (that is, when all the reels are stopped), one predetermined notification type (that is, when all reels are stopped). Here, for example, the notification type A) is automatically determined. Also in this case, the above-mentioned result effect is executed.

It should be noted that the effect of the notification type selected by the player is executed from the next game onward, and is not executed in the game (although it can be configured to be executed from the game). That is, it can be said that the above-mentioned series of effects in the game is the effect at the time of introduction when the RB state is started. Further, even in this way, in the start game in the RB state, the BB promotion lottery and the RB middle navigation lottery are performed as in other games, so that there is no disadvantage to the player.

However, in the second gaming machine, the above-mentioned introductory effect is executed in the start game in the RB state, and the effect by the selected notification type is executed from the next game onward. If the BB promotion lottery is won, it is considered that there is room for ingenuity as to what timing and mode should be used to suggest or notify the lottery. In FIG. 60, which will be described later, an example of such a device will be described.

In FIG. 60, the flow of the “1Gth” and the “2Gth” until the start of normal rotation is the same as that in FIG. 59. However, in FIG. 60, it is assumed that it is decided to shift to the BB state in the BB promotion lottery in the "2Gth".

In this case, in FIG. 60, after the selection effect is executed, the effect button is operated (selection operation) by the player during the game of the game (“2Gth” in FIG. 60), and the desired notification type is selected. Once determined, the effect display unit will display a specific effect different from the above-mentioned result effect (in FIG. 60, "?"
?? ?? "Display) is executed. That is, the player selects the notification type, and the selection effect is normally executed according to the selection result, but the specific effect is executed instead. Similarly, even when the third stop operation is performed without the player performing the selection operation after executing the selection effect (that is, when all the reels are stopped), the above-mentioned result effect is obtained. Instead, a specific effect is executed. However, when the third stop operation is performed without being selected by the player, the result effect may be executed as usual instead of the specific effect, and an incentive for the selection operation may be given.

The specific effect may be, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, as long as it is an effect that at least suggests or informs that the state is different from the normal state, and is, for example, the promotion suggestion effect as the above-mentioned chance notification. It may be the same, or at least a part of the same effect, or it may be the same as the above-mentioned promotion suggestion effect as a definite notification, or at least a part of the same effect. Further, for example, it may be a so-called premium effect that is not normally executed. Further, for example, when the notification type A or the notification type B is selected, the result production of the notification type C is intentionally executed, and the specific production is executed by performing the result production of the production mode different from the selected production mode. It may be done.

Then, when the "2Gth" game is completed (not shown) and the "3Gth" game is started as shown in FIG. 60, the game is in the BB state (here, "weak BB"). ) Is the start game, so first, the reel effect (here, "reel action for weak BB" with lock number "9") in which "Red 7" symbols are displayed is executed, and then the game is started. It will be started. Further, in the effect display unit, a start effect (for example, "BB start" in FIG. 60 is displayed, indicating that the BB state is started at the timing when the "red 7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed by executing the reel effect. ) Is to be executed.

As described above, the notification type C has a notification pattern in which the promotion suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, in FIG. 60, the notification type C is temporarily selected by the player's selection operation after the selection effect is executed. In that case, the result effect according to the selection result may be executed as it is, and the player may be shown the transition to the BB state by suddenly executing the reel effect in the next game.

<A gaming machine that uses the playability of the RB state (and its production specifications)>
In the second gaming machine, for example, by using the playability of the above-mentioned RB state (and its production specifications), it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

For example, it has an RB state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and in the RB state, the "white BAR" symbol alignment is stopped when the next game of the game in which the transition condition is satisfied is started. It is started after the displayed reel effect (for example, the lock medium white BAR alignment effect) is executed, and the effect display unit is the effect mode (for example, the notification type) in the RB state in the start game of the RB state. ) Can be selected from a plurality of effect modes, and after the selection effect is executed, when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation (for example, selection operation), It is a gaming machine that executes an effect according to a selected effect mode during the RB state.

In the second gaming machine, a state in which the effect mode can be selected is described as an RB state, but such a state is not limited to the RB state. For example, even in the CZ1 state, the BB lottery in the CZ1 is performed, and if this is won, the game has the same playability of shifting from the next game to the BB state, so that the CZ1 state can be selected from the production mode. It may be configured as a state.

Further, in the second gaming machine, the selection effect, the result effect described later, and the effect execution means for executing the specific effect are described as the effect display unit, but as long as the player can recognize these effects, other It is also possible to use the effect execution means of.

Further, in the second gaming machine, the effect mode that the player can select is described as the notification type, but such an effect mode is not limited to the notification type. For example, when the player selects a character, a background, or a music (or a combination thereof), the production mode can be selected in such a manner that the production by the selected character, the background, or the music is executed in the RB state. May be good.

Further, the selection operation for selecting the effect mode may be a game operation that reflects the player's intention, and is not limited to the effect operation for the effect button, for example, the time during which the start lever 7 is tilted. , It is also possible to enable the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R to be pressed depending on the time of the pressing operation or the like at the time of any of the stop operations.

Further, for example, when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation after executing the selection effect, the effect display unit executes a result effect indicating the selection result of the effect mode in the game, and the game It is a gaming machine that executes an effect according to an effect mode selected from the next game of.

Further, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a privilege (for example, transition to the BB state) during the RB state, which is the same in the start game of the RB state, and the effect display unit is in the RB state. When it is decided to grant a privilege in the start game, if one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation after executing the selection effect, a specific effect different from the result effect (for example) in the game. , Promotion suggestion production) is a gaming machine that can be executed.

In the second gaming machine, the privilege given during the RB state is described as the transition to the BB state, but such a privilege is not limited to the transition to the BB state. For example, it may be possible to determine whether or not the total number of navigation games is granted during the RB state, and this may be configured as the above-mentioned privilege. Further, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state during the RB state, and this may be configured as the above-mentioned privilege. Further, for example, the game period in the RB state may be extended during the RB state (the number of additional games is given, the number of sets is added, etc.), and this may be configured as the above-mentioned privilege. That is, in the start game in the RB state, the privilege that the specific effect is executed instead of the result effect can be various benefits.

Further, for example, in the start game in the RB state, if all the reels are stopped without selecting one effect mode by the effect operation of the player after the selection effect is executed, a privilege is given in the game. When it is decided not to do so, one predetermined effect mode is determined, and the result effect corresponding to the effect is executed, while it is decided to grant the privilege in the game. Is a gaming machine on which a specific effect is executed.

Further, for example, when it is decided to grant a privilege in a game after the next game of the start game in the RB state, the gaming machine can execute a specific effect without executing a selection effect.

Further, for example, a plurality of effect modes that can be selected by the player include, for example, a notification type B that is a complete notification pattern and a notification type C that is a reel notification pattern, and the notification type B is the start of the RB state. In the game after the next game of the game, the specific effect is always executed when it is decided to grant the privilege, and the notification type C is the game after the next game of the start game in the RB state. It is a gaming machine that is an effect mode in which a specific effect is not executed even when it is decided to give a privilege.

Further, for example, it has a BB state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player, which is a game state different from the RB state, is notified, and in the BB state, the next game of the game in which the transition condition is satisfied is started. At that time, it is started after the reel effect in which the "Red 7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed (for example, the locked red 7 alignment effect) is executed, and it is decided to grant the privilege in the RB state. If so, it is a gaming machine that satisfies the transition condition to the BB state.

Further, for example, there is a case where the RB state has an AT state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player, which is a gaming state different from the RB state and the BB state, is notified, and the RB state does not shift to the AT state after the end. It is a certain gaming state, and the BB state is a gaming machine that is a gaming state that always shifts to the AT state after the end of the gaming state.

In the second gaming machine, the RB state does not shift to the AT state after the end unless it is promoted to the BB state. However, as described above, the AT lottery is performed during the RB state. In the case of winning the case, the AT state may be changed after the end of the RB state. In addition, as a general rule, the BB state is supposed to shift to the AT state after the end, but the AT lottery is performed even during the BB state, and if this is won, the AT state shifts to the AT state after the end of the BB state. However, if this is not the case, the AT state may not be entered after the end of the BB state. However, in order to make a difference in the degree of advantage between the RB state and the BB state, it is desirable that the winning probability of the AT lottery in the BB state is configured to be higher than the winning probability of the AT lottery in the RB state.

Also, for example, in a game in which the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the "bell" in which 9 medals are paid out is displayed, while the correct answer is given. If the stop operation is performed in an incorrect push order different from the push order, the "bell" is not displayed, and in the RB state, the correct push order is the game in which the "push order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state that may not be notified, and the BB state is a gaming state in which the correct answer pushing order is always notified in the game in which the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, for example, when the specified end condition (for example, 21 games have been played) is satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to the BB state in the RB state, the amount of medals given during the RB state is specified. It is a gaming machine that shifts to the BB state when the amount (for example, 0 sheets) or less.

In the second gaming machine, the specific amount is set to "0", but this count may be determined based on the actual payout amount, but according to a predetermined count condition. It may be counted and determined based on the counting result. For example, if the judgment is made based on the actual payout amount, even if the navigation is executed, a stop operation different from this is intentionally performed to arbitrarily reduce the payout amount in the RB state. It is possible that the BB state may be acquired in an unintended manner. Therefore, as for the counting condition, the actual payout amount (9 sheets or 1 sheet or 0 sheets) is counted when there is no navigation when the "push order bell" is won, or in the case of some navigation, and all navigation is performed when the "push order bell" is won. In the case of, "9" is counted (regardless of the actual payout amount), "3" is counted when the "watermelon" is won (regardless of the actual payout amount), and "cherry" is won. It may be configured to count "2 cards" (regardless of the actual payout amount).

In addition, when the specified end condition is satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to the BB state in the RB state, the transition to the BB state as a relief is performed when all navigation is not executed even once in the RB state, or. It may be assumed that a condition such as a case where all navigation is executed less than a specified number of times (for example, 3 times) in the RB state is satisfied.

Further, for example, when the transition condition to the BB state is satisfied in the RB state, the RB state ends even before the specified end condition of the RB state is satisfied, and the gaming machine shifts from the next game to the BB state.

[10-7. Other ideas for the second gaming machine]
Not limited to those described above, the second gaming machine can be further devised in order to enhance the interest of the game. An example of such is described below.

(Press order history display)
As described above, in the second gaming machine, the "bell" is actually displayed depending on whether the "bell" is displayed in the game in which the "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, whether the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order). Not only does the number of medals awarded to the player fluctuate, but also the degree of advantage regarding the transition (grant) and continuation (extension) of the state that is advantageous to the player also fluctuates. Therefore, it is very interesting information for the player which push order is the correct answer when the "push order bell" is won.

Therefore, in the second gaming machine, it is possible to devise such that information regarding the correct answer pressing order of the "pushing order bell" can be provided to the player. That is, if information on the correct answer pressing order for a certain period in the past is provided at any time desired by the player, it is possible to shift (give) or continue (extend) the state that is particularly advantageous to the player ( In a game (which determines whether or not these are performed), the player can select his or her own push order using the information as a clue, so that it is possible to give fun and strategy to guess the correct push order. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

As a specific example thereof, an example of the push order history display in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 shows the display mode in the main effect display unit 21, and as the push order history display, the first history display (upper display in FIG. 61) showing the cumulative number of correct answer push orders for today and the latest 6 times. It shows a state of displaying the second history display (display in the lower right in FIG. 61) showing the contents of the correct answer pressing order of.

Both the first history display and the second history display may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21 or may be displayed on the sub effect display unit 22. , One may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21, and the other may be displayed on the sub effect display unit 22. Further, these may be displayed at the same time, or only one of them may be selected and displayed by the player's selection operation (or only one of them is displayed). However, the other may be displayed by the switching operation of the player).

Further, regardless of whether the game is being played or not being played (for example, even while the reel is rotating), for example, a predetermined operation (for example, any of them) is performed on any of the effect buttons 10a and 10b. It may be displayed when the button is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer, or when the pressing order history display is particularly necessary (for example, CZ1 final state or judge state). , Or when the game that wins the "push order bell" in the CZ2 normal state or AT state is started), it may be automatically displayed without any operation by the player. Further, it may be possible to set whether or not the push order history display is automatically displayed in the user menu (or by performing the above-mentioned predetermined operation).

In addition, the first history display shows the cumulative number of correct answer push orders for today. Specifically, the "push order bell" is used from when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on to when it is turned off. The correct answer of the game that was won in (That is, it displays the history information about the "push order bell" in units of business days of the amusement shop).

The cumulative number of correct answer push orders is counted by a counter provided on the main side (that is, managed by the main side), and the count result is transmitted to the sub side so that the sub side pushes the order. The history may be displayed, or it may be counted by a counter provided on the sub side (that is, managed by the sub side), and the sub from the main side regardless of which game state it is in. The sub side may be able to display the push order history by transmitting at least information about the correct push order in the game that wins the "push order bell" to the side. Further, in the latter case, the information regarding the correct answer pressing order may be transmitted to the sub side as the above-mentioned "instruction number", or the information regarding the correct answer pressing order may be transmitted to the sub side as information different from the "instruction number". It may be sent to. However, in the second gaming machine, the above-mentioned "instruction number" does not necessarily indicate the correct answer pressing order itself in the normal state in which navigation is not executed, or in the AT state in which "2-choice navigation" or "4-choice navigation" is executed. Information may not be provided (see FIGS. 56 and 57), and even in a game in which the correct answer pressing order is not notified, if the correct answer pressing order is transmitted to the sub side each time the game starts, the information is incorrect. There is also an increased risk of goto acts such as being read by. Therefore, for example, it is desirable that the information regarding the correct answer pressing order is different from the above-mentioned "instruction number", and is also the information included in the winning operation command transmitted at the end of the game.

In addition, the second history display indicates the contents of the order of pressing the correct answer for the last 6 times. Specifically, the most recent predetermined game period (6 times as an example, but any number of times other than this) The content of the correct push order (in other words, the type of push order bell) of the game that wins the "push order bell" in the number of games that can be set, for example, 30 games, etc.) (That is, the stored contents are sequentially updated in the FIFO format, for example, until the power is turned off), and this content is displayed (that is, the history related to the "pushing order bell" in a predetermined game period unit. It displays information). As with the above, the information may be managed on the main side or may be managed on the sub side.

Further, in the second history display, it may be displayed in a display mode so that it can be recognized whether or not the player has actually stopped the operation in the correct pressing order. For example, in FIG. 61, the histories of "1 time before", "4 times before", and "5 times before" are all "middle left and right", but "4 times before" can be stopped in the order of pressing the correct answer. If the stop operation was not performed in the correct answer pressing order in "1 time before" and "5 times before" (the stop operation was performed in the incorrect answer pressing order), the "middle left and right" of "4 times before" The display mode may be displayed in a display mode different from the display modes of "1 time before" and "5 times before". For example, the "middle left and right" of "4 times before" is displayed in large characters, while the "middle left and right" of "1 time before" and "5 times before" are displayed in small characters. Further, for example, the "middle left and right" of "4 times before" is displayed in yellow, while the "middle left and right" of "1 time before" and "5 times before" are displayed in gray. By doing so, the player can know the information including whether or not the stop operation was actually performed in the correct pressing order. Further, the push order (regardless of correct answer or incorrect answer) in which the stop operation is actually performed may be displayed for the correct push order shown in each.

Further, in the second history display, whether or not the navigation is executed (and the contents of the executed navigation) may be displayed in a display mode so that it can be recognized. For example, in FIG. 61, "all navigation" is executed in "1 time before" and "3 times before", "no navigation" in "4 times before", and "4" in "5 times before". If "selection navigation" is executed and "2 selection navigation" is executed in "6 times ago", for example, the history of "1 time ago" is set to "middle left and right (all navigation)" and "2 times". The history of "previous" is set to "right and left middle (all navigation)", the history of "3 times before" is set to "left and right middle (all navigation)", and the history of "4 times before" is set to "middle left and right (no navigation)". , The history of "5 times ago" may be displayed as "middle left and right (4 choice navigation)", and the history of "6 times ago" may be displayed as "left middle right (2 choice navigation)". By doing so, the player can know the information including whether or not the navigation is executed.

The first history display and the second history display are merely examples of the push order history display. Only one of these may be displayed, or together with or in place of these, the push order history display stored according to another condition may be displayed.

Here, an example of playability using the push order history display will be described. For example, in the judge state, it is assumed that the "push order bell" is won, the "two-choice navigation" occurs and the "middle first stop" is navigated, and at this time, the first history display and the second history display are displayed. Is displayed. In this case, in the second history display shown in FIG. 61, there are many "middle left and right" histories. Therefore, one player predicts that the next will be "middle left and right", and another player predicts that the next will be "middle right and left". Further, in this case, for example, it is assumed that there are many "middle left and right" histories even in the first history display. In this case, the former can perform the stop operation with the expectation that the self-guess is correct, and the latter can perform the stop operation with the expectation that the probabilities will soon converge. That is, by displaying the push order history in such a situation, it is possible to dramatically improve the enjoyment predicted by the player in such a situation.

As described above, in the second gaming machine, for example, in the game in which the "pushing order bell" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the correct answer pressing order, the "bell" is displayed, while the correct answer pressing order is displayed. Is a game in which a different symbol combination from the "bell" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a different incorrect pressing order, and the "pushing order bell" is won in a specific situation (for example, a judge state). If the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, a specific privilege (for example, extension of the AT state) can be granted, and the history of the correct push order when the "push order bell" is won according to the predetermined conditions. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can store information and display the history information according to specific conditions.

(Special production for avoiding BAR alignment)
As described above, the second gaming machine is provided with an internal winning combination (“F_replay B”, “F_replay C”, and “F_replay D”) described as “special”. Then, in this "special", if the pressing position is appropriate by pressing forward (first stop on the left), "white BAR" symbols are displayed side by side on a predetermined line ("BAR2 alignment" in FIG. 55). If the pressing position is appropriate at least by reverse pressing (first stop on the right), the "black BAR" symbols are displayed side by side on a predetermined line ("BAR1 alignment" in FIG. 55).

Then, for example, in the RB state, when the notification patterns A and B are selected, if the BB promotion lottery is won due to the winning of the "special", the "white BAR" is aimed at by pushing forward. If the announcement effect is generated and the "white BAR" symbols are aligned, the promotion to BB will be confirmed (in the case of announcement pattern A, another role in which the "white BAR" symbols are not aligned will be won. Even if the BB promotion lottery is not won, the notification effect may occur as a ghost effect).

Further, for example, although the description is omitted in the above, in the BB state, the number of continuous sets in the AT state (synonymous with the above-mentioned “right to execute the AT state”) is added (in short, the number of sets to be extended is confirmed). The number of sets added to the lottery is to be increased), and in the lottery to add the number of sets, it is possible to add the number of sets with a predetermined probability at least due to winning the "special". If you win the lottery by adding the number of sets due to winning the "special", a notification effect will occur to aim for the "black BAR" symbol by pushing backwards, and if the "black BAR" symbols are aligned , The addition of the number of sets is confirmed (In addition, even if you win another role that does not have the "black BAR" pattern and you do not win the lottery to add the number of sets, the announcement effect is not good. It may occur as a production).

As described above, the "special" functions as a so-called chance role, at least in the RB state and the BB state, and also makes the mode of the notification effect (including whether or not to execute the notification effect) different. As a result, it is possible to make the RB state and the BB state function as if they were different chance roles, even though they have the same internal winning combination.

However, for example, there is a gaming state in which such a role does not function as a chance role (or does not want to function), as in the normal state, but the "special" is naturally internal even in such a gaming state. It can be determined as a winning combination (see, for example, Fig. 49), and if it wins "special" in the RB state but does not win the BB promotion lottery, or if it wins "special" in the BB state, it is set. In some cases, you may not win the lottery by adding a number, but even in such a case, if you aim for "white BAR" by pushing forward or "black BAR" by pushing backward, "white BAR" pattern or "black BAR" The symbols will be displayed together, and the player will be confused.

Therefore, in the second gaming machine, when "special" is determined as the internal winning combination under such circumstances, it can be executed even when "cherry" or "watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to devise such that the production is executed. That is, when a special effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a possibility of winning a "cherry" or a "watermelon".

Here, focusing on the symbol arrangement of the reel 3L (see FIG. 47), when it is desired to display the "cherry" symbol on the reel 3L, the "black BAR" symbol is usually aimed at, so the "white BAR" symbol is used. Is not displayed, and if you want to display the "white BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol is not displayed because you aim at the vicinity of the "white BAR" symbol (because the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 symbols). Further, in the second gaming machine, the "cherry" is configured as a role in which a dropout may occur (see FIG. 55). Therefore, when the special effect is executed, the player will perform a stop operation aiming at the vicinity of the "black BAR" symbol so that the "cherry" is not missed, and it is actually appropriate. It is also a good game method. That is, when the player performs the stop operation by pushing forward, if he / she tries to play the game by an appropriate game method according to the execution of the special effect, it is possible to avoid that the “white BAR” symbols are aligned as a result.

Focusing on the symbol arrangement of the reel 3C (see FIG. 47), when it is desired to display the "watermelon" symbol on the reel 3C, a special symbol other than the "black BAR" symbol ("red 7" symbol) is usually used. Since we are aiming near the "blue 7" symbol and "white BAR" symbol), the "black BAR" symbol is not displayed, and if we want to display the "black BAR" symbol, we aim at the vicinity of the "black BAR" symbol. , "Watermelon" symbols are not displayed (because the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 symbols). Further, in the second gaming machine, the "watermelon" is configured as a role in which a watermelon may be missed (see FIG. 55). Therefore, when the special effect is executed, the player will perform a stop operation aiming at the vicinity of the special symbol other than the "black BAR" symbol so that the "watermelon" is not missed. Is actually a proper game method. That is, when the player performs the stop operation other than the forward push, if the player tries to play the game by an appropriate game method according to the execution of the special effect, it is possible to avoid that the "black BAR" symbols are aligned as a result.

In addition, when the player is performing the stop operation by pushing backward, if the reel 3R is aimed at the vicinity of the "black BAR" symbol, the stop display mode of the first stop (in short, the "black BAR" symbol). Is displayed or the "watermelon" symbol is displayed), it is possible to determine whether or not the "watermelon" has been won, but on the other hand, it is possible to determine whether the "watermelon" has been won or not. It will not be possible (see Fig. 55. At the first stop on the right, only "Rip alignment" will be displayed as a stop). That is, if the game is played by pushing backwards, there is a high possibility that it will not be possible to determine that an opportunity has arrived. Therefore, if an attempt is made to play a game by an appropriate game method, the possibility that the game is played by a reverse push is inevitably low, and as a result, it is possible to avoid having "black BAR" symbols aligned. However, the above-mentioned symbol arrangement such as the reel 3C may be applied to the reel 3R, and further, it may be possible to avoid the “black BAR” symbol alignment.

(1st special production)
As described above, in the second gaming machine, the BB state started by executing the reel effect of "blue 7" symbols is a strong BB state, and the player has a higher degree of advantage than the weak BB state. It has become. Therefore, in order to suggest that the player has a high degree of advantage during the strong BB state, the first special effect different from the normal effect is performed.

The first special production is, for example, a continuous production in which a series of stories (using video and audio) flows over multiple games, which is called a so-called "episode production" (or "story production", etc.). Can be configured. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of such effects, each of which has at least a part of the content (episode) different from each other, and in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

In the second gaming machine, it is possible to determine which content the first special effect is to be executed according to the situation immediately before the transition to the strong BB state (related one). Can be done.

In the second gaming machine, it is possible to shift from any of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the RB state, and the AT state (via the judge state) to the strong BB state. Therefore, for example, the CZ1 state is strong. When shifting to the BB state, the first special effect in which the episodes related to the characters mainly appearing in the CZ1 state flow is determined, and when shifting from the CZ2 state to the strong BB state, the episodes related to the characters mainly appearing in the CZ2 state are determined. When the first special effect in which the character flows is determined and the RB state shifts to the strong BB state, the first special effect in which the episode mainly related to the character mainly appearing in the RB state flows can be determined.

In addition, for example, in the AT state, a different enemy character can appear in each set, and in the judge state after the set is exhausted, a battle effect with the appearing enemy character is performed, and the extension is successful. In that case, the result of the battle effect will be shown as a battle victory, and if the extension fails, the result of the battle effect will be shown as a battle defeat. In the case of transition, it is possible to determine the first special effect in which episodes related to the enemy character (and ally character) that have appeared are played.

Further, for example, even in the AT state, it is possible to execute an episode effect in which the story progresses sequentially between a plurality of sets (for example, the 1st set to the 11th set), and the state of the judge after the set is digested is changed to the strong BB state. If so, the first special effect in which the episode related to the executed episode effect (or the episode appropriately summarized according to the progress of the episode effect in the AT state) is played can be determined. In this way, even if the episode production in the AT state progresses to some extent and then shifts to the strong BB state, there is no discrepancy in the relationship and no discomfort, and the advantageous state ( You can enjoy the first special production during (strong BB state).

(2nd special production)
As described above, in the second gaming machine, when the judge level becomes "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" in the AT state of 30 games per set, the AT state is extended to the next set. It is confirmed that Further, in the AT state, it is possible to give a plurality of sets of all navigation states of 5 games per set.

Here, since the AT state is 30 games per set, even if a plurality of sets of all navigation states are given, the total number of navigation states that can be digested by one set of AT states is basically 6 sets. Therefore, in the second gaming machine, a continuous effect that can be executed between five games in all navigation states (for example, it may be configured as the above-mentioned "episode effect" or may be configured as a different effect). 6 types are prepared (referred to as "continuous effects 1 to 6"), and in the AT state, the effects are sequentially executed according to the execution of one set of all navigation states. Further, the continuous effects 1 to 6 constitute a series of effects when they are connected in order (originally, they are one effect, which may be divided into 6).

Then, a series of productions in which the continuous productions 1 to 6 are connected in order (partially, the beginning and the end may be different, basically the same production is sufficient) is set as the second special production. It can be used for other purposes. In that case, we try to devise ways to prevent discrepancies in the content.

Specifically, when the judge level becomes "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" in the set in the AT state (when the corresponding "AP" is given), the following of the set. In the game of, the second special effect is executed. By doing so, although the content of the advantage is different between the case where the next set is confirmed in the AT state and the case where all the navigation is generated, the same effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show that it is advantageous to the player, and it is also possible to reduce the amount of data for the production.

When the second special effect is executed according to the judgment level becoming "Lv.4" or "Lv.5", for example, the second special effect is performed even though the number of remaining games in the set is small. If is executed from the beginning, the player cannot watch the second special production to the end, and there is a possibility that the content may be inconsistent and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when executing continuous effects 1 to 6 in all navigation states, the number of remaining games in the set is not considered (because it is divided every 5 games), but it is executed as the second special effect. In that case, the number of games remaining in the set is taken into consideration. For example, if the judge level is "Lv.4" in the 21st game of the set and the second special effect is executed from the 22nd game, the continuous production 5-2 is performed between the 22nd and 25th games. The same effect as that of the 5th game is executed, and the same effect as that of the 1st to 5th games of the continuous effect 6 is executed during the 26th to 30th games.

That is, even if the same effect is used, when it is used as each of the continuous effects 1 to 6, it is executed by so-called cueing, while when it is also used as the second special effect. , Regardless of the classification as continuous effects 1 to 6, it is possible to execute from the middle. By doing so, while reducing the amount of data by standardizing the production data of the production executed in different situations, there is no discrepancy and no discomfort, and the advantageous state (AT state) is in progress. You can entertain the second special production of.

[10-8. Summary of Inventions Related to Second Pachinko Machines (Appendix)]
As described above, the second gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

(First invention group)
In a conventional gaming machine, a special gaming state (for example, an AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and a special gaming state in which the expectation of transition to this special gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state (for example, an AT state). For example, it has been proposed to provide a CZ (chance zone) state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-104445).

By the way, since such a special game state is one of the states in which the player enhances the interest of the game, for example, if the playability related to the duration, the lottery content, etc. is monotonous, the interest of the game There was a problem that there was a possibility that the amount would decrease.

The first invention group aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of gaming.

It was determined that a variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) for determining an internal winning combination. It is advantageous to the player when special conditions are satisfied with the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the reel stop control process) that stops the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. The special gaming state control means (for example, the second gaming machine controls each gaming state) that can be controlled to the special gaming state (for example, the RB state or the BB state in the second gaming machine) to which the information of the stop operation is notified. Main CPU101) and a special gaming state (for example, a second game) in which the expectation that the special condition is satisfied is higher than that in the normal gaming state (for example, the normal state in the second gaming machine) when the special condition is satisfied. A special gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the second gaming machine) that can be controlled by the CZ2 state in the machine) is provided, and the specified end condition of the special gaming state is a predetermined combination (for example). For example, the number of times a predetermined symbol combination (for example, the bell in the second gaming machine) is not displayed in a game in which the push order bell in the second gaming machine is determined as the internal winning combination is the specified number of times (for example, 7 times). ) Is a gaming machine characterized by including reaching.
According to this gaming machine, in a special gaming state in which the expectation of transition to the special gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state, the duration thereof depends on whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. Fluctuates. That is, it is possible to cause undulations during the game period in the special game state according to the game result of the player. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The stop control means displays the predetermined symbol combination when the stop operation in a predetermined mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) is performed in the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, while the predetermined combination is displayed. When a stop operation different from the embodiment is performed, a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The above description is characterized by further comprising a special notification means (for example, an instruction monitor or an effect display unit) capable of notifying information on a stop operation (for example, 4-choice navigation or 2-choice navigation or all navigation) which is advantageous for the above. It is a game machine of.
According to this gaming machine, in the special gaming state, whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won (that is, whether or not the gaming period in the special gaming state progresses) is further stopped. It also varies depending on whether or not the information of is notified. That is, it is possible to cause undulations during the game period in the special game state depending on whether or not the stop operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

The special notification means performs a first notification (for example, all navigation) in which all of the predetermined modes are notified, and a second notification (for example, 4-choice navigation or 2) in which a part of the predetermined mode is notified. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it may perform selective navigation).
According to this gaming machine, in the special gaming state, whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won (that is, whether or not the gaming period in the special gaming state progresses) is further stopped. It also varies depending on the mode of notification of the information. That is, it is possible to cause undulations during the game period in the special game state depending on the notification mode of the stop operation information. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

The notification mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the navigation lottery in CZ2) for determining the mode of the notification performed by the special notification means is further provided, and the notification mode determining means is the game in which the second notification is performed. When the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the state in which the second notification can be performed (for example, the navigation state 1 or the navigation state 2) is continued, and when the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the first 2 The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the state in which notification can be performed is terminated.
According to this gaming machine, when a part of the stop operation mode in which the predetermined symbol combination is displayed is notified in the special gaming state, the notification can be performed depending on whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is finally displayed. It is determined whether the state will continue. That is, the duration of the notification varies according to the player's game result (selection result of the stop operation mode), and as a result, it is possible to cause undulations in the game period in the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

The internal winning combination determining means is characterized in that a specific combination (for example, a common bell in a second gaming machine) capable of displaying the predetermined symbol combination can be determined as the internal winning combination regardless of the mode of the stop operation. It is the gaming machine described above.
According to this gaming machine, when a specific combination is won in a special gaming state, a predetermined symbol combination is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode of the player. Therefore, for example, the player (wins the predetermined combination). ) It may be possible to avoid the progress of the gaming period in the special gaming state by the own stop operation, or to give the impression that a predetermined privilege is given as described later. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

When the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the special gaming state, a privilege granting means (for example, a CP granting lottery) capable of granting a predetermined privilege (for example, CP in the second gaming machine) that contributes to the establishment of the special condition is provided. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that the main CPU 101) is further provided.
According to this gaming machine, for example, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a game in which a predetermined combination is won, it is possible not only to prevent the gaming period of the special gaming state from progressing, but also to shift to the special gaming state. It is possible to give a predetermined privilege that contributes to. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

The above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that the above-mentioned privilege giving means can give the predetermined privilege in response to the establishment of the special condition.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to grant a predetermined privilege even when a special gaming state is started. That is, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the special gaming state even when the special gaming state is started. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

The privilege granting means can grant the predetermined privilege even when a special combination (for example, a fixed combination in the second gaming machine) for which the predetermined symbol combination cannot be displayed is determined as an internal winning combination. The above-mentioned gaming machine as a feature.
According to this gaming machine, even if a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed in a special gaming state, a predetermined privilege may be granted. That is, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player even if the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to the above-described machine, characterized in that, in the special gaming state, when the predetermined privilege is granted in a predetermined situation (for example, the cumulative CP is 5), the special condition can be satisfied. be.
According to this gaming machine, in a special gaming state, for example, if a predetermined combination of symbols can be displayed when a predetermined combination is won, the special gaming state is continued and a predetermined privilege is given, and as a result of the accumulation of the special gaming. You may also be given the benefit of being able to transition to a state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

The special gaming state is configured to be sustainable until the predetermined end condition is satisfied even after the predetermined privilege grant status becomes the predetermined condition, and when the specified end condition is satisfied, the predetermined privilege is satisfied. The special condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the special gaming state when the granting status of the above-mentioned is the predetermined situation. After that, the predetermined privilege can be granted, and there are a plurality of types (for example, RB and BB in the second gaming machine) having different advantages in the special gaming state, and the specified termination condition in the special gaming state. When the above condition is satisfied, the specific situation (for example, the cumulative CP is 6 or more) in which the predetermined privilege is further granted from the predetermined situation is obtained as compared with the case where the predetermined privilege is granted in the predetermined situation. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is easier to shift to the special gaming state, which has a higher advantage.
According to this gaming machine, even if the provision status of the predetermined privilege becomes the predetermined situation and the transition to the special gaming state is decided, the special gaming state shall be continued until the specified termination condition is satisfied, and further. When a predetermined privilege is given, it becomes easy to shift to a special gaming state with a high degree of advantage. That is, the special gaming state is configured so that even after the decision to shift to the special gaming state is made, it is possible to give further benefits during the remaining gaming period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

In the special gaming state, if the predetermined end condition is satisfied before the predetermined privilege grant status becomes the predetermined status, it is possible to determine at least whether or not the predetermined privilege grant status is the predetermined status. The gaming machine according to the above, further comprising a determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a special CP grant lottery).
According to this gaming machine, even if the predetermined privilege grant status does not become the predetermined status and the prescribed end condition is satisfied in the special gaming state, the predetermined privilege grant status is finally set to the predetermined status. In some cases, the transition to the special gaming state may be decided. That is, the special gaming state is configured so that the player can always be expected from the start to the end. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of the special gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

(Second invention group)
In a conventional gaming machine, a special gaming state (for example, an AT gaming state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified is provided, and the gaming period of the special gaming state is set by one unit (set) of a predetermined number of games. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008- See Japanese Patent Publication No. 272233).

However, in such a gaming machine, whether or not the special gaming state continues is determined simply according to a predetermined continuation rate, so that the gaming performance is monotonous and there is a risk that the interest of the gaming will be reduced. There was a problem that there was.

The second invention group aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of gaming.

It was determined that a variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) for determining an internal winning combination. It is possible to notify the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the reel stop control process) that stops the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player, and the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. A gaming state control means for controlling a transition between a plurality of gaming states including at least a special gaming state (for example, an AT state in a second gaming machine) (for example, controlling a transition between each gaming state in the second gaming machine). The main CPU 101) and an extension determination means (for example, a second) capable of determining whether or not to extend the special gaming state (for example, determining whether or not to perform a judge reward lottery). The main CPU 101) that controls the judge state in the gaming machine, and the extension determining means is the extension according to the game of one unit (for example, one set of 30 games) in the special gaming state. It is possible to make a pass / fail decision, and when the game state control means decides to extend the special game state by the extension pass / fail decision, the special game state is transferred to the next unit, and the extension is performed. If it is not decided to extend the special gaming state by the approval / disapproval decision, the special gaming state can be terminated in the unit, and in the special gaming state, the specific grant condition is satisfied. It is possible to give a specific value (for example, AP), and the extension determination means can determine at least the extension possibility according to the specific value given in the special gaming state of the unit. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.
According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation of extension as to whether or not the special gaming state is extended varies for each unit depending on the status of granting a specific value and the result of determining whether or not the special gaming state can be extended. That is, for each unit, it is possible to cause undulations in the degree of extension expectation of the special gaming state according to the game result of the player. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The specific granting condition includes displaying a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine), and the stop control means has a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell in the second gaming machine). In the game determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation in a predetermined mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) is performed, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, while the stop operation different from the predetermined mode is performed. In this case, a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, information on the stop operation which is advantageous for displaying the predetermined symbol combination (for example,). The gaming machine described above is further provided with information notification means (for example, an instruction monitor and an effect display unit) capable of notifying (2, 2-choice navigation and all navigation).
According to this gaming machine, in a special gaming state, it is one of the specific granting conditions that a specific value is given that a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, and this predetermined symbol combination is displayed. Whether or not it varies depending on whether or not the stop operation information is notified. That is, in the special gaming state, it is possible to change the granting status of the specific value depending on whether or not the information of the stop operation is notified for the predetermined combination, and thereby the degree of advantage of the subsequent extension possibility determination can also be changed. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The information notification means performs a first notification (for example, all navigation) in which all of the predetermined embodiments are notified, and a second notification (for example, two-choice navigation) in which a part of the predetermined embodiment is notified. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it may be performed.
According to this gaming machine, whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won in the special gaming state further varies depending on the notification mode of the information of the stop operation. That is, in the special gaming state, it is possible to change the granting status of the specific value depending on the notification mode of the information of the stop operation regarding the predetermined combination, and thereby change the degree of advantage of the subsequent extension possibility determination. .. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The notification mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the all navigation state lottery and the navigation lottery during AT) for determining the mode of the notification performed by the information notification means is further provided, and the notification mode determining means is in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the state in which the first notification can be performed (for example, the all navigation state) can be continued over a plurality of games.
According to this gaming machine, in a special gaming state, a state in which all of the stop operation modes in which a predetermined symbol combination is displayed can be notified may continue over a plurality of games. That is, it is possible to create a state in which the addition of a specific value is given preferential treatment depending on the notification mode of the stop operation information without unnecessarily increasing the control load. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The internal winning combination determining means can determine a specific combination (for example, a common bell in the second gaming machine) capable of displaying the predetermined symbol combination regardless of the mode of the stop operation as the internal winning combination, and the special The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is possible to perform notification by the information notification means even when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a gaming state.
According to this gaming machine, when a specific combination is won in a special gaming state, a predetermined symbol combination is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode of the player. In this case, for example, when the information of the stop operation is not notified (or, for example, the case where only a part of the information is notified), the player is notified of his / her own stop operation (although he / she wins a predetermined role). In some cases, it is possible to give an impression that a specific value has been given, and for example, when information on a stop operation is notified, it may give an impression that a specific value has been given. You may be able to do it. That is, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the continuation of the game result or the lottery result which is not desirable for the player at the time of winning the predetermined role, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the presence or absence of the notification of the stop operation. It is possible to make the playability even more diverse. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the special game state, when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed without being notified by the information notification means, the specific value is additionally assigned. (For example, an additional lottery is performed when the self-powered bell is displayed).
According to this gaming machine, the fact that the information on the stop operation is not notified may not necessarily act disadvantageously for the player. That is, when the stop operation is not notified, a specific value may be additionally given to the player as compared with the case where the stop operation is notified, so that the stop operation is notified. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game due to the absence. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The extension possibility determination is performed in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game, it is determined to extend the special gaming state. The above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to perform notification by the information notification means (for example, a navigation lottery during a judge is performed) even in a game in which the extension possibility determination is performed.
According to this gaming machine, the predetermined combination is also used for determining whether or not the predetermined combination can be extended, and it is possible to determine whether or not the information on the stop operation is notified even in the determination of whether or not the predetermined combination can be extended. That is, the predetermined combination changes the granting status of the specific value in the special gaming state, and changes the decision result in the decision of whether to extend or not, and further, the information of the stop operation is notified regarding the predetermined combination. It is also possible to cause undulations in the extended expectation of the special game state depending on whether or not it is played. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, even in this way, since it is not necessary to increase the winning combination and the gaming state, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data and the control load.

The plurality of gaming states further include an extension determination state (for example, a judge state in the second gaming machine) capable of determining whether or not the extension is possible, and the gaming state control means is one unit in the special gaming state. When the minute game is played, the game is shifted to the extension determined state, and when it is determined by the extension propriety decision to extend the special gaming state in the extension decision state, the special gaming state is shifted to the next unit. If it is not decided to extend the special gaming state by the extension permission determination, the special gaming state can be terminated in the unit, and the specific value is given in the special gaming state. Then, a stage (for example, Lv.0 to Lv.5) according to the accumulated grant result can be set, and in the extension determination state, the extension possibility determination is performed for the number of times according to the set stage. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.
According to this gaming machine, in the extension decision state, the extension possibility determination is performed for the number of times according to the stage set according to the given specific value. As a result, for example, in the special game state, the specific value can be given in small lots by lottery, so that the expectation of giving the specific value in the special game state can be increased, and in the extension decision state, the extension is decided. Since the number of executions can be easily understood, it is possible to prevent the playability from becoming difficult to understand. Further, for example, it is possible to increase the expectation by showing the player information that suggests a specific value given or a stage set by the specific value. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The above-described above, wherein in the extension determination state, when the set stage is a specific stage (for example, Lv.4) or more, it is always determined to extend the special gaming state. It is a gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, when the specific value given in the special gaming state becomes a specific situation and a stage higher than the specific stage is set, it is always determined that the special gaming state is extended. That is, since the extension of the special gaming state may be determined depending on the granting status of the specific value during the special gaming state, the game playability can be further varied, and the expectation during the special gaming state can be further enhanced. It is possible to further increase. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the special gaming state, it is possible to determine whether or not the set stage is set to the highest stage regardless of the cumulative grant result of the specific value (for example, Lv.5 promotion lottery is performed). The gaming machine described above is characterized by the above.
According to this gaming machine, for example, even if the current specific value granting situation is not desirable for the player in the special gaming state, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The plurality of gaming states are gaming states in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and a specific gaming state different from the special gaming state (for example, a BB state in the second gaming machine) is further added. Including, when it is determined by the extension possibility determination that the special gaming state is to be extended, the gaming state control means may shift to the specific gaming state and then shift the special gaming state to the next unit. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.
According to this gaming machine, when the special gaming state is extended to the next unit, the transition may occur after passing through a specific gaming state that is also advantageous to the player. That is, when deciding whether or not to extend the special game state, it is not only decided whether or not to extend the special game state, but the special game state may be extended after shifting to the specific game state. Therefore, the playability can be further varied, and the expectation of whether or not to extend the game can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Third invention group)
In a conventional gaming machine, it has been proposed that a player can select a favorite character to select the content of an effect to be executed during a special gaming state (for example, a bonus game) that is advantageous to the player. (For example, see JP-A-2008-148810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, various kinds of special gaming states can be provided, and specifications such as a start opportunity and a timing thereof are also various. For this reason, depending on the type of special gaming state, the player may not be able to smoothly select the production, and there is a problem that the interest in the production may be lowered.

The third invention group aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in directing.

It was determined that a variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) for determining an internal winning combination. It is advantageous to the player when special conditions are satisfied with the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the reel stop control process) that stops the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Special gaming state control means that can control the special gaming state (for example, the RB state in the second gaming machine) to which the stop operation information is notified (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the second gaming machine). An effect executing means (for example, an effect display unit) for executing the effect, and an effect operating means (for example, an effect button) capable of accepting a player's effect operation related to the effect executed by the effect executing means. In the special game state, when the next game of the game in which the special condition is satisfied is started, the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the variable display means (for example, a lock medium white BAR alignment effect). Is started, and the effect executing means sets the effect mode (for example, notification type) in the special game state in a plurality of effect modes in the game in which the special game state is started. It is possible to execute a selection effect for selecting from, and when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation after executing the selection effect, the special game is performed according to the selected effect mode. It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed during a state.
According to this gaming machine, the special gaming state is configured to start after the special symbol effect is executed when the next game of the game for which the transition condition is satisfied is started. A selection effect that allows the player to select the effect mode during the special game state is executed. That is, even if the special game state is started after the corresponding symbol effect is executed in the first game, it is possible to smoothly select the effect mode in the flow of the game. .. Therefore, even in the special gaming state of such a configuration, the production selection can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the production can be enhanced.

After executing the selection effect, the effect execution means executes a result effect indicating the selection result of the effect mode in the game when one effect mode is selected by the effect operation of the player, and next to the game. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it executes an effect according to an effect mode selected from the game.
According to this gaming machine, in the start game of the special gaming state, after the special symbol effect is executed and the selection effect is executed, when the player selects the effect mode, the result effect corresponding to this selection result is produced in the game. Is executed, and the effect is executed in the effect mode selected from the next game. That is, the start game of the special game state is produced at the time of introduction while keeping the benefits during the special game state (for example, information on an advantageous stop operation is notified and specific benefits described later are given). It is possible to configure it as a state in which Therefore, even in the special gaming state having such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly execute the production at the time of introduction including the production selection, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the production.

Further provided with a privilege granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a BB promotion lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific privilege during the special gaming state, the privilege granting means has started the special gaming state. It is possible to determine whether or not to grant the specific privilege in the game, and it is determined that the effect executing means grants the specific privilege by the privilege granting means in the game in which the special gaming state is started. In that case, after executing the selection effect, if one effect mode is selected by the effect operation of the player, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, promotion suggestion effect) different from the result effect in the game. The gaming machine described above is characterized by the above.
According to this gaming machine, a specific privilege may be given even in the start game of the special gaming state, and in this case, it is possible to execute a specific effect different from the result effect at the time of the effect operation related to the player's effect selection. And. That is, essentially, in a situation where the selection result of the effect selection is shown, it is possible to suggest the result of granting the specific privilege to the player by executing the effect having different contents. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically enhance the interest of the production at the time of introduction in the special gaming state of such a configuration, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

In the game in which the special gaming state is started, after the selection effect is executed by the effect execution means, the variable display of the symbols in all the columns is displayed without selecting one effect mode by the effect operation of the player. In the case of stopping, if it is determined by the privilege granting means not to grant the specific privilege, one predetermined effect mode is determined, and the result effect is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means when it is determined by the privilege granting means to grant the specific privilege.
According to this gaming machine, even if the player is not so interested in the production selection or wants to advance the game quickly, even if the production selection is not made, the result is at the end of the game. The effect may be executed, and further, a specific effect may be executed. Therefore, while considering the intention of the player, it is possible to dramatically enhance the interest of the production at the time of introduction in the special gaming state of such a configuration, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

When it is determined by the privilege granting means to grant the specific privilege in a game after the next game of the game in which the special gaming state is started, the effect executing means does not execute the selection effect. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that a specific effect can be executed.
According to this gaming machine, the specific effect suggesting the result of granting the specific privilege functions as one of the operation-linked effects whose mode changes depending on the player's effect operation in the start game of the special gaming state. In subsequent games, it functions as one of the suggestive effects. Therefore, not only can the interest in the production be enhanced, but also the amount of data related to the production can be suppressed.

The plurality of effect modes include a first effect mode (for example, a notification type B which is a complete notification pattern) and a second effect mode (for example, a notification type C which is a reel notification pattern). The effect mode is that the specific effect is always executed when it is determined by the privilege granting means that the specific privilege is to be granted in the game after the next game of the game in which the special gaming state is started. The second aspect of the effect is the case where the specific privilege is to be granted by the privilege granting means in the game after the next game of the game in which the special gaming state is started. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the specific effect is not executed.
According to this gaming machine, in the game after the start game of the special gaming state, depending on the selected effect mode, the specific effect may or may not suggest the result of granting the specific privilege. It has become. In the latter case, for example, the result of granting the specific privilege can be notified to the player by executing the specific symbol effect described later. That is, it is possible to notify the player of the grant result of the specific privilege by various methods according to the selected notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variety of suggestive productions in line with the player's intentions, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the production.

When a specific condition is satisfied, it is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a BB state in the second gaming machine) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, which is a gaming state different from the special gaming state. Further, a possible specific gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the second gaming machine) is further provided, and the specific gaming state is when the next game of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied is started. In addition, the specific symbol effect for causing the variable display means to stop and display the specific symbol combination (for example, the effect of matching 7 reds in the lock) is executed, and the specific privilege is given by the privilege giving means. When it is determined that the above-mentioned game machine is satisfied, the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied.
According to this gaming machine, the specific privilege is a privilege to shift to the specific gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the specific symbol effect is executed when the next game of the game for which the transition condition is satisfied is started. It is configured to start after being played. That is, for example, when the game shifts to the special game state, the game is started after the special symbol effect is executed in the start game, but when the specific privilege is given in the game, the next game is the start of the specific game state. It becomes a game, and in the start game, the specific game state is started after the specific symbol effect is executed. Then, in this case, since the start game of the specific game state is started after the specific effect is executed according to the effect operation of the player in the start game of the special game state, these effects are the flow of the game. It will be executed with high interlocking. Therefore, even when the special gaming state and the specific gaming state are configured in this way, the interlocking and consistency of the production can be dramatically improved, and the interest in the production can be enhanced.

A predetermined gaming state that can be controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, an AT state in the second gaming machine) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, which is a gaming state different from the special gaming state and the specific gaming state. A gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in a second gaming machine) is further provided, and the special gaming state is a gaming state that may not shift to the predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. The above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that the specific gaming state is a gaming state that always shifts to the predetermined gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state.
According to this gaming machine, the special gaming state and the specific gaming state are both similar gaming states in that information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, but the special gaming state is predetermined after the end. While it is a gaming state that may not shift to the gaming state, it is advantageous to the player in that the specific gaming state is a gaming state that always shifts to the predetermined gaming state after the end. Then, the specific effect suggests a transition to the specific game state based on such game performance. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the production.

The stop control means is a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell in the second gaming machine) is determined as an internal winning combination, and a stop operation in a predetermined mode (for example, a correct answer push order) is performed. Displays a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine) to which a predetermined amount (for example, 9 pieces) of gaming value is given, while when a stop operation different from the predetermined mode is performed, The special gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined combination is not displayed and the stop operation of the predetermined mode may not be notified in the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the predetermined combination is in a gaming state in which the stop operation of the predetermined mode is always notified in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination.
According to this gaming machine, both the special gaming state and the specific gaming state are similar gaming states in that information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, but the special gaming state is the winning combination. While it is a gaming state in which information on an advantageous stop operation is sometimes not notified, the specific gaming state is advantageous to the player in that information on an advantageous stop operation is always notified when a predetermined winning combination is won. It has become. Then, the specific effect suggests a transition to the specific game state based on such game performance. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the production.

When the specified end condition (for example, the game of 21 games has been played) is satisfied without satisfying the specific condition in the special game state, the game value amount given during the special game state is the specific amount (for example). For example, the gaming machine described above is characterized by shifting to the specific gaming state when the number is 0) or less.
According to this gaming machine, if the gaming result during the special gaming state is an undesired result for the player, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state after the special condition is not satisfied. There is. Therefore, it is possible not only to enhance the interest in the production, but also to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

The above-mentioned description, wherein when the specific condition is satisfied in the special gaming state, the special gaming state ends even before the specified end condition is satisfied, and the next game shifts to the specific gaming state. It is a gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, when it is decided to shift to the specific gaming state during the special gaming state, it is possible to end the special gaming state even during that process. Therefore, not only can the interest in the production be enhanced, but also the gambling of the game can be suppressed from becoming excessively high.

1 ... Pachislot machine, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 100 ... Main control circuit, 101 ... Main CPU, 200 ... Sub control circuit, 201 ... Sub CPU

Claims (3)

A variable display means that can variablely display multiple symbols in multiple columns,
The means for determining the internal winning combination and the means for determining the internal winning combination,
A stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the determined internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified when a special condition is satisfied, and a special game state control means.
A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which the expectation that the special condition is satisfied is higher than that of the normal game state when the special condition is satisfied is provided.
The stop control means is a game in which a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when a predetermined mode of stop operation is performed, a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, while a stop operation different from the predetermined mode is performed. In that case, a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the special notification means capable of transmitting information on the stop operation which is advantageous for displaying the predetermined symbol combination is further provided.
The special gaming state is configured so that the number of games is not specified, and the number of times the predetermined combination is not displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination can be continued until the specified number of times is reached. A gaming machine featuring. The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein the specified number of times is set to at least two times or more . When the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the special gaming state, a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege that contributes to the establishment of the special condition and a privilege granting means.
Further provided with a grant status notification means capable of notifying the grant status of the predetermined privilege in the special gaming state.
The privilege granting means can further grant the predetermined privilege according to the establishment of the special condition.
In the special gaming state, when the provision status of the predetermined privilege becomes the predetermined situation, the special condition can be satisfied.
The grant status notification means can notify the grant status of the predetermined privilege without including the predetermined privilege granted in response to the establishment of the special condition.
Even if it is not notified by the grant status notification means that the grant status of the predetermined privilege is the predetermined status, the grant status of the predetermined privilege may be the predetermined status. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Images